[gtk+] docs: use proper apostrophe



commit 7a208fbbf3d28c8b5bfeb1c612d60305ab3a235e
Author: William Jon McCann <william jon mccann gmail com>
Date:   Fri Feb 7 13:01:26 2014 -0500

    docs: use proper apostrophe
    
    https://wiki.gnome.org/Design/OS/Typography

 gdk/gdkdevice.c                    |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkdevice.h                    |    6 +-
 gdk/gdkdisplay.c                   |    6 +-
 gdk/gdkevents.c                    |    6 +-
 gdk/gdkevents.h                    |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkframeclock.c                |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkframetimings.c              |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkkeys.c                      |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkpango.c                     |    8 +-
 gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c           |    2 +-
 gdk/gdkrectangle.c                 |    4 +-
 gdk/gdkrgba.c                      |    2 +-
 gdk/gdkscreen.c                    |    8 +-
 gdk/gdktypes.h                     |    2 +-
 gdk/gdkvisual.c                    |    8 +-
 gdk/gdkwindow.c                    |   74 +++++++++---------
 gdk/gdkwindow.h                    |   10 +-
 gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c   |    4 +-
 gdk/quartz/gdkwindow-quartz.c      |    4 +-
 gdk/win32/gdkdnd-win32.c           |    4 +-
 gdk/win32/gdkevents-win32.c        |    6 +-
 gdk/win32/gdkmain-win32.c          |    2 +-
 gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c            |    2 +-
 gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c           |   10 +-
 gdk/x11/gdkkeys-x11.c              |    4 +-
 gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c          |    8 +-
 gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c            |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c         |    8 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c    |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.c    |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.h    |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorseldialog.c |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkgradient.c       |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c      |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c         |    4 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c    |    6 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c             |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c          |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c          |   20 +++---
 gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c          |    2 +-
 gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c         |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c               |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkaccelgroup.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkaccelmap.c                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkaccessible.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkactionable.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkadjustment.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.h          |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkassistant.c                 |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkassistant.h                 |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkbindings.c                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkbox.c                       |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkbuilder.c                   |   14 ++--
 gtk/gtkbuilder.h                   |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkbutton.c                    |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkcellarea.c                  |   54 +++++++-------
 gtk/gtkcellarea.h                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c           |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkcellareacontext.h           |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkcelllayout.h                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c              |   24 +++---
 gtk/gtkcellrenderer.h              |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkcellview.c                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c             |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkclipboard.c                 |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkcombobox.c                  |   14 ++--
 gtk/gtkcombobox.h                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcontainer.c                 |   24 +++---
 gtk/gtkcontainer.h                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcssprovider.c               |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkcsssection.h                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkcssstyleproperty.c          |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkdialog.c                    |   18 ++--
 gtk/gtkdnd-quartz.c                |   20 +++---
 gtk/gtkdnd.c                       |   28 ++++----
 gtk/gtkdnd.h                       |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkdrawingarea.c               |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkentry.c                     |   30 ++++----
 gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c               |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c           |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkenums.h                     |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkexpander.c                  |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkfilechooser.c               |   30 ++++----
 gtk/gtkfilechooser.h               |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c         |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c         |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c         |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c           |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkflowbox.c                   |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkframe.c                     |   10 +-
 gtk/gtkgladecatalog.c              |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkgrid.c                      |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkicontheme.c                 |   10 +-
 gtk/gtkiconview.c                  |   24 +++---
 gtk/gtkimage.c                     |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkimcontext.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkinfobar.c                   |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkkeyhash.c                   |    2 +-
 gtk/gtklabel.c                     |   38 +++++-----
 gtk/gtklayout.c                    |    6 +-
 gtk/gtklevelbar.c                  |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkliststore.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkmain.c                      |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkmenu.c                      |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkmenubutton.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkmenuitem.c                  |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkmenushell.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c            |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkmenutracker.c               |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkmenutrackeritem.c           |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c             |   12 ++--
 gtk/gtknumerableicon.c             |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkorientable.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkpaned.c                     |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c             |   10 +-
 gtk/gtkplacessidebar.h             |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkplug.c                      |   12 ++--
 gtk/gtkprinter.c                   |   12 ++--
 gtk/gtkprivate.c                   |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkprogressbar.c               |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkquartz.c                    |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkradiobutton.c               |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkrange.c                     |   34 ++++----
 gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c         |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c             |   18 ++--
 gtk/gtkscale.c                     |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkscalebutton.c               |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkscrollable.c                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkscrollbar.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c            |   20 +++---
 gtk/gtksearchbar.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkselection.c                 |    4 +-
 gtk/gtkseparator.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtksizerequest.c               |   14 ++--
 gtk/gtksocket.c                    |    8 +-
 gtk/gtkspinbutton.c                |   10 +-
 gtk/gtkstatusbar.c                 |   14 ++--
 gtk/gtkstylecontext.c              |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkstylecontext.h              |   16 ++--
 gtk/gtktestutils.c                 |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktextattributes.h            |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktextbtree.c                 |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktextbuffer.c                |   18 ++--
 gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c        |   24 +++---
 gtk/gtktextiter.c                  |   16 ++--
 gtk/gtktextlayout.c                |    8 +-
 gtk/gtktextlayout.h                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktextmark.c                  |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktextsegment.c               |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktextsegment.h               |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktexttag.c                   |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktexttagtable.c              |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktextview.c                  |   22 +++---
 gtk/gtkthemingengine.c             |   12 ++--
 gtk/gtktogglebutton.c              |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c          |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktooltip.c                   |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktreednd.c                   |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktreemenu.c                  |   10 +-
 gtk/gtktreemodel.c                 |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c           |   10 +-
 gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.h           |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktreeselection.c             |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktreestore.c                 |    4 +-
 gtk/gtktreeview.c                  |   26 +++---
 gtk/gtktreeview.h                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c            |    6 +-
 gtk/gtkviewport.c                  |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkwidget.c                    |  152 ++++++++++++++++++------------------
 gtk/gtkwidget.h                    |   62 +++++++-------
 gtk/gtkwin32embed.h                |    2 +-
 gtk/gtkwindow.c                    |   52 ++++++------
 172 files changed, 751 insertions(+), 751 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdevice.c b/gdk/gdkdevice.c
index d413804..a9ecf39 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdevice.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdevice.c
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ gdk_device_get_property (GObject    *object,
  * @mask: location to store the modifiers, or %NULL.
  *
  * Gets the current state of a pointer device relative to @window. As a slave
- * device's coordinates are those of its master pointer, this
+ * device’s coordinates are those of its master pointer, this
  * function may not be called on devices of type %GDK_DEVICE_TYPE_SLAVE,
  * unless there is an ongoing grab on them. See gdk_device_grab().
  */
@@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ gdk_device_get_mode (GdkDevice *device)
  * @mode: the input mode.
  *
  * Sets a the mode of an input device. The mode controls if the
- * device is active and whether the device's range is mapped to the
+ * device is active and whether the device’s range is mapped to the
  * entire screen or to a single window.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the mode was successfully changed.
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdevice.h b/gdk/gdkdevice.h
index f9f853d..a67f4b5 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdevice.h
+++ b/gdk/gdkdevice.h
@@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ typedef enum
 /**
  * GdkInputMode:
  * @GDK_MODE_DISABLED: the device is disabled and will not report any events.
- * @GDK_MODE_SCREEN: the device is enabled. The device's coordinate space
+ * @GDK_MODE_SCREEN: the device is enabled. The device’s coordinate space
  *                   maps to the entire screen.
- * @GDK_MODE_WINDOW: the device is enabled. The device's coordinate space
+ * @GDK_MODE_WINDOW: the device is enabled. The device’s coordinate space
  *                   is mapped to a single window. The manner in which this window
  *                   is chosen is undefined, but it will typically be the same
  *                   way in which the focus window for key events is determined.
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ typedef enum {
 /**
  * GdkTimeCoord:
  * @time: The timestamp for this event.
- * @axes: the values of the device's axes.
+ * @axes: the values of the device’s axes.
  *
  * A #GdkTimeCoord stores a single event in a motion history.
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdisplay.c b/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
index c7cfabd..acea8bd 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ gdk_display_get_event (GdkDisplay *display)
  * gdk_display_peek_event:
  * @display: a #GdkDisplay 
  * 
- * Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display's event queue, without
+ * Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display’s event queue, without
  * removing the event from the queue.  (Note that this function will
  * not get more events from the windowing system.  It only checks the events
  * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
@@ -1615,7 +1615,7 @@ gdk_display_request_selection_notification (GdkDisplay *display,
  * @display: a #GdkDisplay
  *
  * Returns whether the speicifed display supports clipboard
- * persistance; i.e. if it's possible to store the clipboard data after an
+ * persistance; i.e. if it’s possible to store the clipboard data after an
  * application has quit. On X11 this checks if a clipboard daemon is
  * running.
  *
@@ -1945,7 +1945,7 @@ _gdk_display_get_next_serial (GdkDisplay *display)
  *
  * Indicates to the GUI environment that the application has finished
  * loading. If the applications opens windows, this function is
- * normally called after opening the application's initial set of
+ * normally called after opening the application’s initial set of
  * windows.
  *
  * GTK+ will call this function automatically after opening the first
diff --git a/gdk/gdkevents.c b/gdk/gdkevents.c
index e191739..11a8064 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkevents.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkevents.c
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ gdk_event_peek (void)
  * @event: a #GdkEvent.
  *
  * Appends a copy of the given event onto the front of the event
- * queue for event->any.window's display, or the default event
+ * queue for event->any.window’s display, or the default event
  * queue if event->any.window is %NULL. See gdk_display_put_event().
  **/
 void
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ _gdk_event_get_pointer_emulated (GdkEvent *event)
  * @event: a #GdkEvent
  * 
  * Copies a #GdkEvent, copying or incrementing the reference count of the
- * resources associated with it (e.g. #GdkWindow's and strings).
+ * resources associated with it (e.g. #GdkWindow’s and strings).
  * 
  * Return value: a copy of @event. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
  * gdk_event_free().
@@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ gdk_event_get_time (const GdkEvent *event)
  * 
  * If the event contains a “state” field, puts that field in @state. Otherwise
  * stores an empty state (0). Returns %TRUE if there was a state field
- * in the event. @event may be %NULL, in which case it's treated
+ * in the event. @event may be %NULL, in which case it’s treated
  * as if the event had no state field.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if there was a state field in the event 
diff --git a/gdk/gdkevents.h b/gdk/gdkevents.h
index a490548..aebca9e 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkevents.h
+++ b/gdk/gdkevents.h
@@ -993,11 +993,11 @@ struct _GdkEventOwnerChange
  * @device: the master device that the event originated from. Use
  * gdk_event_get_source_device() to get the slave device.
  *
- * Proximity events are generated when using GDK's wrapper for the
+ * Proximity events are generated when using GDK’s wrapper for the
  * XInput extension. The XInput extension is an add-on for standard X
  * that allows you to use nonstandard devices such as graphics tablets.
  * A proximity event indicates that the stylus has moved in or out of
- * contact with the tablet, or perhaps that the user's finger has moved
+ * contact with the tablet, or perhaps that the user’s finger has moved
  * in or out of contact with a touch screen.
  *
  * This event type will be used pretty rarely. It only is important for
diff --git a/gdk/gdkframeclock.c b/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
index 26ce863..6a76cfa 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
@@ -252,10 +252,10 @@ gdk_frame_clock_init (GdkFrameClock *clock)
  * @frame_clock: a #GdkFrameClock
  *
  * Gets the time that should currently be used for animations.  Inside
- * the processing of a frame, it's the time used to compute the
+ * the processing of a frame, it’s the time used to compute the
  * animation position of everything in a frame. Outside of a frame, it's
  * the time of the conceptual “previous frame,” which may be either
- * the actual previous frame time, or if that's too old, an updated
+ * the actual previous frame time, or if that’s too old, an updated
  * time.
  *
  * Since: 3.8
diff --git a/gdk/gdkframetimings.c b/gdk/gdkframetimings.c
index 5f671d0..0245d46 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkframetimings.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkframetimings.c
@@ -25,11 +25,11 @@
  * @Title: Frame timings
  *
  * A #GdkFrameTimings object holds timing information for a single frame
- * of the application's displays. To retrieve #GdkFrameTimings objects,
+ * of the application’s displays. To retrieve #GdkFrameTimings objects,
  * use gdk_frame_clock_get_timings() or gdk_frame_clock_get_current_timings().
  * The information in #GdkFrameTimings is useful for precise synchronization
  * of video with the event or audio streams, and for measuring
- * quality metrics for the application's display, such as latency and jitter.
+ * quality metrics for the application’s display, such as latency and jitter.
  */
 
 G_DEFINE_BOXED_TYPE (GdkFrameTimings, gdk_frame_timings,
diff --git a/gdk/gdkkeys.c b/gdk/gdkkeys.c
index e3297dc..145a2e0 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkkeys.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkkeys.c
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
  * two Hebrew characters. The Hebrew characters will be printed on the key next to
  * the English characters.
  *
- * In order to use a keymap to interpret a key event, it's necessary to first
+ * In order to use a keymap to interpret a key event, it’s necessary to first
  * convert the keyboard state into an effective group and level. This is done via a
  * set of rules that varies widely according to type of keyboard and user
  * configuration. The function gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state() accepts a
@@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ gdk_keymap_real_get_modifier_mask (GdkKeymap         *keymap,
  * @keymap: a #GdkKeymap
  * @intent: the use case for the modifier mask
  *
- * Returns the modifier mask the @keymap's windowing system backend
+ * Returns the modifier mask the @keymap’s windowing system backend
  * uses for a particular purpose.
  *
  * Note that this function always returns real hardware modifiers, not
diff --git a/gdk/gdkpango.c b/gdk/gdkpango.c
index 7b5227e..ba46f2a 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkpango.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkpango.c
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ layout_iter_get_line_clip_region (PangoLayoutIter *iter,
  * Obtains a clip region which contains the areas where the given
  * ranges of text would be drawn. @x_origin and @y_origin are the top left
  * position of the layout. @index_ranges
- * should contain ranges of bytes in the layout's text. The clip
+ * should contain ranges of bytes in the layout’s text. The clip
  * region will include space to the left or right of the line (to the
  * layout bounding box) if you have indexes above or below the indexes
  * contained inside the line. This is to draw the selection all the way
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ gdk_pango_layout_line_get_clip_region (PangoLayoutLine *line,
  * Obtains a clip region which contains the areas where the given ranges
  * of text would be drawn. @x_origin and @y_origin are the top left point
  * to center the layout. @index_ranges should contain
- * ranges of bytes in the layout's text.
+ * ranges of bytes in the layout’s text.
  * 
  * Note that the regions returned correspond to logical extents of the text
  * ranges, not ink extents. So the drawn layout may in fact touch areas out of
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ gdk_pango_layout_get_clip_region (PangoLayout *layout,
  * #cairo_font_options_t) for the default screen; if these options
  * change it will not be updated. Using gtk_widget_get_pango_context()
  * is more convenient if you want to keep a context around and track
- * changes to the screen's font rendering settings.
+ * changes to the screen’s font rendering settings.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for the default display
  **/
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ gdk_pango_context_get (void)
  * (see #cairo_font_options_t) for the screen; if these options
  * change it will not be updated. Using gtk_widget_get_pango_context()
  * is more convenient if you want to keep a context around and track
- * changes to the screen's font rendering settings.
+ * changes to the screen’s font rendering settings.
  * 
  * Return value: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for @screen
  *
diff --git a/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c b/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
index b6d238e..2bf954b 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
  * other windows, then the contents of the pixbuf areas corresponding
  * to the obscured regions are undefined.
  *
- * If the window is not mapped (typically because it's iconified/minimized
+ * If the window is not mapped (typically because it’s iconified/minimized
  * or not on the current workspace), then %NULL will be returned.
  *
  * If memory can't be allocated for the return value, %NULL will be returned
diff --git a/gdk/gdkrectangle.c b/gdk/gdkrectangle.c
index c06e719..919c3a2 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkrectangle.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkrectangle.c
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
  * @Title: Points and Rectangles
  *
  * GDK provides the #GdkPoint and #GdkRectangle data types for representing pixels
- * and sets of pixels on the screen. Together with Cairo's #cairo_region_t data
+ * and sets of pixels on the screen. Together with Cairo’s #cairo_region_t data
  * type, they make up the central types for representing graphical data.
  *
  * A #GdkPoint represents an x and y coordinate of a point.
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ gdk_rectangle_union (const GdkRectangle *src1,
  *
  * Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
  * @dest to be the same as either @src1 or @src2. If the rectangles 
- * do not intersect, @dest's width and height is set to 0 and its x 
+ * do not intersect, @dest’s width and height is set to 0 and its x 
  * and y values are undefined. If you are only interested in whether
  * the rectangles intersect, but not in the intersecting area itself,
  * pass %NULL for @dest.
diff --git a/gdk/gdkrgba.c b/gdk/gdkrgba.c
index f60929f..88fcdf8 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkrgba.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkrgba.c
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
  * @Title: RGBA Colors
  *
  * #GdkRGBA is a convenient way to pass rgba colors around.
- * It's based on cairo's way to deal with colors and mirrors its behavior.
+ * It’s based on cairo’s way to deal with colors and mirrors its behavior.
  * All values are in the range from 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive. So the color
  * (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0) represents transparent black and
  * (1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0) is opaque white. Other values will be clamped
diff --git a/gdk/gdkscreen.c b/gdk/gdkscreen.c
index 22479a9..f54dcca 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkscreen.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkscreen.c
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ gdk_screen_height_mm (void)
  *   previously set default font options.
  *
  * Sets the default font options for the screen. These
- * options will be set on any #PangoContext's newly created
+ * options will be set on any #PangoContext’s newly created
  * with gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen(). Changing the
  * default set of font options does not affect contexts that
  * have already been created.
@@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ gdk_screen_list_visuals (GdkScreen *screen)
  * gdk_screen_get_system_visual:
  * @screen: a #GdkScreen.
  *
- * Get the system's default visual for @screen.
+ * Get the system’s default visual for @screen.
  * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
  * The return value should not be freed.
  *
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_system_visual (GdkScreen * screen)
  * The windowing system on which GTK+ is running
  * may not support this capability, in which case %NULL will
  * be returned. Even if a non-%NULL value is returned, its
- * possible that the window's alpha channel won't be honored
+ * possible that the window’s alpha channel won't be honored
  * when displaying the window on the screen: in particular, for
  * X an appropriate windowing manager and compositing manager
  * must be running to provide appropriate display.
@@ -989,7 +989,7 @@ gdk_screen_make_display_name (GdkScreen *screen)
  * gdk_screen_get_active_window:
  * @screen: a #GdkScreen
  *
- * Returns the screen's currently active window.
+ * Returns the screen’s currently active window.
  *
  * On X11, this is done by inspecting the _NET_ACTIVE_WINDOW property
  * on the root window, as described in the
diff --git a/gdk/gdktypes.h b/gdk/gdktypes.h
index ce1c2da..7b46d24 100644
--- a/gdk/gdktypes.h
+++ b/gdk/gdktypes.h
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ typedef enum
  * currently used windowing system backend uses for particular
  * purposes. For example, on X11/Windows, the Control key is used for
  * invoking menu shortcuts (accelerators), whereas on Apple computers
- * it's the Command key (which correspond to %GDK_CONTROL_MASK and
+ * it’s the Command key (which correspond to %GDK_CONTROL_MASK and
  * %GDK_MOD2_MASK, respectively).
  *
  * Since: 3.4
diff --git a/gdk/gdkvisual.c b/gdk/gdkvisual.c
index caea334..89fa045 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkvisual.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkvisual.c
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
  * may be in the top 8 bits of the pixel, or may be in the lower 4 bits.
  *
  * There are several standard visuals. The visual returned by
- * gdk_screen_get_system_visual() is the system's default visual.
+ * gdk_screen_get_system_visual() is the system’s default visual.
  *
  * A number of functions are provided for determining the “best” available
  * visual. For the purposes of making this determination, higher bit depths
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ gdk_list_visuals (void)
 /**
  * gdk_visual_get_system:
  *
- * Get the system's default visual for the default GDK screen.
+ * Get the system’s default visual for the default GDK screen.
  * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
  * The return value should not be freed.
  *
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best_with_both (gint          depth,
  * @count: return location for number of available depths
  *
  * This function returns the available bit depths for the default
- * screen. It's equivalent to listing the visuals
+ * screen. It’s equivalent to listing the visuals
  * (gdk_list_visuals()) and then looking at the depth field in each
  * visual, removing duplicates.
  *
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ gdk_query_depths (gint **depths,
  * @count: return location for the number of available visual types
  *
  * This function returns the available visual types for the default
- * screen. It's equivalent to listing the visuals
+ * screen. It’s equivalent to listing the visuals
  * (gdk_list_visuals()) and then looking at the type field in each
  * visual, removing duplicates.
  *
diff --git a/gdk/gdkwindow.c b/gdk/gdkwindow.c
index 68414d0..407695c 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkwindow.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkwindow.c
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
  * @Title: Windows
  *
  * A #GdkWindow is a (usually) rectangular region on the screen.
- * It's a low-level object, used to implement high-level objects such as
+ * It’s a low-level object, used to implement high-level objects such as
  * #GtkWidget and #GtkWindow on the GTK+ level. A #GtkWindow is a toplevel
  * window, the thing a user might think of as a “window” with a titlebar
  * and so on; a #GtkWindow may contain many #GdkWindows. For example,
@@ -2045,7 +2045,7 @@ _gdk_window_destroy (GdkWindow *window,
  *
  * Destroys the window system resources associated with @window and decrements @window's
  * reference count. The window system resources for all children of @window are also
- * destroyed, but the children's reference counts are not decremented.
+ * destroyed, but the children’s reference counts are not decremented.
  *
  * Note that a window will not be destroyed automatically when its reference count
  * reaches zero. You must call this function yourself before that happens.
@@ -2239,7 +2239,7 @@ gdk_window_has_native (GdkWindow *window)
  * current window position, regardless of which events have been
  * received or processed.
  *
- * The position coordinates are relative to the window's parent window.
+ * The position coordinates are relative to the window’s parent window.
  *
  **/
 void
@@ -2287,7 +2287,7 @@ gdk_window_get_parent (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * Obtains the parent of @window, as known to GDK. Works like
  * gdk_window_get_parent() for normal windows, but returns the
- * window's embedder for offscreen windows.
+ * window’s embedder for offscreen windows.
  *
  * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
  *
@@ -2310,14 +2310,14 @@ gdk_window_get_effective_parent (GdkWindow *window)
  * gdk_window_get_toplevel:
  * @window: a #GdkWindow
  *
- * Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+ * Gets the toplevel window that’s an ancestor of @window.
  *
  * Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
  * toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
  * has a root window as parent.
  *
  * Note that you should use gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel() when
- * you want to get to a window's toplevel as seen on screen, because
+ * you want to get to a window’s toplevel as seen on screen, because
  * gdk_window_get_toplevel() will most likely not do what you expect
  * if there are offscreen windows in the hierarchy.
  *
@@ -2342,7 +2342,7 @@ gdk_window_get_toplevel (GdkWindow *window)
  * gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel:
  * @window: a #GdkWindow
  *
- * Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+ * Gets the toplevel window that’s an ancestor of @window.
  *
  * Works like gdk_window_get_toplevel(), but treats an offscreen window's
  * embedder as its parent, using gdk_window_get_effective_parent().
@@ -2373,7 +2373,7 @@ gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * Gets the list of children of @window known to GDK.
  * This function only returns children created via GDK,
- * so for example it's useless when used with the root window;
+ * so for example it’s useless when used with the root window;
  * it only returns windows an application created itself.
  *
  * The returned list must be freed, but the elements in the
@@ -3710,7 +3710,7 @@ gdk_window_process_updates_with_mode (GdkWindow     *window,
  * Sends one or more expose events to @window. The areas in each
  * expose event will cover the entire update area for the window (see
  * gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details). Normally GDK calls
- * gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf, so there's no
+ * gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf, so there’s no
  * need to call this function unless you want to force expose events
  * to be delivered immediately and synchronously (vs. the usual
  * case, where GDK delivers them in an idle handler). Occasionally
@@ -3956,7 +3956,7 @@ gdk_window_invalidate_maybe_recurse_full (GdkWindow            *window,
  *
  * GDK will call gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf
  * whenever your program returns to the main loop and becomes idle, so
- * normally there's no need to do that manually, you just need to
+ * normally there’s no need to do that manually, you just need to
  * invalidate regions that you know should be redrawn.
  *
  * The @child_func parameter controls whether the region of
@@ -4007,7 +4007,7 @@ gdk_window_invalidate_region_full (GdkWindow       *window,
  *
  * GDK will call gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf
  * whenever your program returns to the main loop and becomes idle, so
- * normally there's no need to do that manually, you just need to
+ * normally there’s no need to do that manually, you just need to
  * invalidate regions that you know should be redrawn.
  *
  * The @invalidate_children parameter controls whether the region of
@@ -4041,7 +4041,7 @@ gdk_window_invalidate_region (GdkWindow       *window,
  *
  * GDK will call gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf
  * whenever your program returns to the main loop and becomes idle, so
- * normally there's no need to do that manually, you just need to
+ * normally there’s no need to do that manually, you just need to
  * invalidate regions that you know should be redrawn.
  *
  * This version of invalidation is used when you recieve expose events
@@ -4068,7 +4068,7 @@ _gdk_window_invalidate_for_expose (GdkWindow       *window,
  * no longer have an invalid/dirty region; the update area is removed
  * from @window and handed to you. If a window has no update area,
  * gdk_window_get_update_area() returns %NULL. You are responsible for
- * calling cairo_region_destroy() on the returned region if it's non-%NULL.
+ * calling cairo_region_destroy() on the returned region if it’s non-%NULL.
  *
  * Return value: the update area for @window
  **/
@@ -4254,7 +4254,7 @@ gdk_window_thaw_toplevel_updates_libgtk_only (GdkWindow *window)
  * if you are redrawing the same region 400 times you may never
  * notice, aside from noticing a speed problem. Enabling update
  * debugging causes GTK to flicker slowly and noticeably, so you can
- * see exactly what's being redrawn when, in what order.
+ * see exactly what’s being redrawn when, in what order.
  *
  * The --gtk-debug=updates command line option passed to GTK+ programs
  * enables this debug option at application startup time. That's
@@ -5058,7 +5058,7 @@ gdk_window_restack (GdkWindow     *window,
  * top of the window stack (moves the window to the front of the
  * Z-order).
  *
- * This function maps a window so it's visible onscreen. Its opposite
+ * This function maps a window so it’s visible onscreen. Its opposite
  * is gdk_window_hide().
  *
  * When implementing a #GtkWidget, you should call this function on the widget's
@@ -5547,8 +5547,8 @@ gdk_window_move_resize_internal (GdkWindow *window,
 /**
  * gdk_window_move:
  * @window: a #GdkWindow
- * @x: X coordinate relative to window's parent
- * @y: Y coordinate relative to window's parent
+ * @x: X coordinate relative to window’s parent
+ * @y: Y coordinate relative to window’s parent
  *
  * Repositions a window relative to its parent window.
  * For toplevel windows, window managers may ignore or modify the move;
@@ -5594,8 +5594,8 @@ gdk_window_resize (GdkWindow *window,
 /**
  * gdk_window_move_resize:
  * @window: a #GdkWindow
- * @x: new X position relative to window's parent
- * @y: new Y position relative to window's parent
+ * @x: new X position relative to window’s parent
+ * @y: new Y position relative to window’s parent
  * @width: new width
  * @height: new height
  *
@@ -5628,7 +5628,7 @@ gdk_window_move_resize (GdkWindow *window,
  * strictly be necessary.
  *
  * For X11, a minimum area will be invalidated if the window has no
- * subwindows, or if the edges of the window's parent do not extend
+ * subwindows, or if the edges of the window’s parent do not extend
  * beyond the edges of the window. In other cases, a multi-step process
  * is used to scroll the window which may produce temporary visual
  * artifacts and unnecessary invalidations.
@@ -5815,7 +5815,7 @@ gdk_window_set_background_pattern (GdkWindow *window,
  * returned and you'll have to query it yourself.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): The pattern to use for the background or
- *     %NULL to use the parent's background.
+ *     %NULL to use the parent’s background.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -6200,12 +6200,12 @@ gdk_window_get_root_coords (GdkWindow *window,
 /**
  * gdk_window_coords_to_parent:
  * @window: a child window
- * @x: X coordinate in child's coordinate system
- * @y: Y coordinate in child's coordinate system
+ * @x: X coordinate in child’s coordinate system
+ * @y: Y coordinate in child’s coordinate system
  * @parent_x: (out) (allow-none): return location for X coordinate
- * in parent's coordinate system, or %NULL
+ * in parent’s coordinate system, or %NULL
  * @parent_y: (out) (allow-none): return location for Y coordinate
- * in parent's coordinate system, or %NULL
+ * in parent’s coordinate system, or %NULL
  *
  * Transforms window coordinates from a child window to its parent
  * window, where the parent window is the normal parent as returned by
@@ -6260,10 +6260,10 @@ gdk_window_coords_to_parent (GdkWindow *window,
 /**
  * gdk_window_coords_from_parent:
  * @window: a child window
- * @parent_x: X coordinate in parent's coordinate system
- * @parent_y: Y coordinate in parent's coordinate system
- * @x: (out) (allow-none): return location for X coordinate in child's coordinate system
- * @y: (out) (allow-none): return location for Y coordinate in child's coordinate system
+ * @parent_x: X coordinate in parent’s coordinate system
+ * @parent_y: Y coordinate in parent’s coordinate system
+ * @x: (out) (allow-none): return location for X coordinate in child’s coordinate system
+ * @y: (out) (allow-none): return location for Y coordinate in child’s coordinate system
  *
  * Transforms window coordinates from a parent window to a child
  * window, where the parent window is the normal parent as returned by
@@ -6453,7 +6453,7 @@ gdk_window_set_child_shapes (GdkWindow *window)
  * for @window. See gdk_window_shape_combine_region().
  *
  * This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_shapes()
- * because it includes @window's shape mask in the set of shapes to
+ * because it includes @window’s shape mask in the set of shapes to
  * be merged.
  */
 void
@@ -6579,7 +6579,7 @@ gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes (GdkWindow *window)
  * for @window. See gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region().
  *
  * This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes()
- * because it includes @window's input shape mask in the set of
+ * because it includes @window’s input shape mask in the set of
  * shapes to be merged.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -6651,7 +6651,7 @@ gdk_window_get_composited (GdkWindow *window)
  * windows do not automatically have their contents drawn to
  * the screen. Drawing is redirected to an offscreen buffer
  * and an expose event is emitted on the parent of the composited
- * window. It is the responsibility of the parent's expose handler
+ * window. It is the responsibility of the parent’s expose handler
  * to manually merge the off-screen content onto the screen in
  * whatever way it sees fit.
  *
@@ -9449,7 +9449,7 @@ gdk_window_set_modal_hint (GdkWindow *window,
  * @skips_taskbar: %TRUE to skip the taskbar
  *
  * Toggles whether a window should appear in a task list or window
- * list. If a window's semantic type as specified with
+ * list. If a window’s semantic type as specified with
  * gdk_window_set_type_hint() already fully describes the window, this
  * function should not be called in addition,
  * instead you should allow the window to be treated according to
@@ -9472,7 +9472,7 @@ gdk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint (GdkWindow *window,
  * Toggles whether a window should appear in a pager (workspace
  * switcher, or other desktop utility program that displays a small
  * thumbnail representation of the windows on the desktop). If a
- * window's semantic type as specified with gdk_window_set_type_hint()
+ * window’s semantic type as specified with gdk_window_set_type_hint()
  * already fully describes the window, this function should
  * not be called in addition, instead you should
  * allow the window to be treated according to standard policy for
@@ -9567,7 +9567,7 @@ gdk_window_set_title (GdkWindow   *window,
  * When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_role() instead
  * of this low-level function.
  *
- * The window manager and session manager use a window's role to
+ * The window manager and session manager use a window’s role to
  * distinguish it from other kinds of window in the same application.
  * When an application is restarted after being saved in a previous
  * session, all windows with the same title and role are treated as
@@ -9850,7 +9850,7 @@ gdk_window_deiconify (GdkWindow *window)
  * gdk_window_stick:
  * @window: a toplevel #GdkWindow
  *
- * “Pins” a window such that it's on all workspaces and does not scroll
+ * “Pins” a window such that it’s on all workspaces and does not scroll
  * with viewports, for window managers that have scrollable viewports.
  * (When using #GtkWindow, gtk_window_stick() may be more useful.)
  *
@@ -9858,7 +9858,7 @@ gdk_window_deiconify (GdkWindow *window)
  * support, so may have no effect with many window managers. However,
  * GDK will do the best it can to convince the window manager to stick
  * the window. For window managers that don't support this operation,
- * there's nothing you can do to force it to happen.
+ * there’s nothing you can do to force it to happen.
  *
  **/
 void
diff --git a/gdk/gdkwindow.h b/gdk/gdkwindow.h
index b3287d7..95bdca5 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkwindow.h
+++ b/gdk/gdkwindow.h
@@ -122,9 +122,9 @@ typedef enum
  * @GDK_HINT_ASPECT: aspect ratio fields are set
  * @GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC: resize increment fields are set
  * @GDK_HINT_WIN_GRAVITY: window gravity field is set
- * @GDK_HINT_USER_POS: indicates that the window's position was explicitly set
+ * @GDK_HINT_USER_POS: indicates that the window’s position was explicitly set
  *  by the user
- * @GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE: indicates that the window's size was explicitly set by
+ * @GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE: indicates that the window’s size was explicitly set by
  *  the user
  *
  * Used to indicate which fields of a #GdkGeometry struct should be paid
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ struct _GdkWindowAttr
  * @win_gravity: window gravity, see gtk_window_set_gravity()
  *
  * The #GdkGeometry struct gives the window manager information about
- * a window's geometry constraints. Normally you would set these on
+ * a window’s geometry constraints. Normally you would set these on
  * the GTK+ level using gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(). #GtkWindow
  * then sets the hints on the #GdkWindow it creates.
  *
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ struct _GdkWindowAttr
  * terminal will have a 1x1 character terminal area, and only terminal sizes on
  * the “character grid” will be allowed.
  *
- * Here's an example of how the terminal example would be implemented, assuming
+ * Here’s an example of how the terminal example would be implemented, assuming
  * a terminal area widget called “terminal” and a toplevel window “toplevel”:
  *
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ void gdk_window_set_composited   (GdkWindow *window,
 
 /*
  * This routine allows you to merge (ie ADD) child shapes to your
- * own window's shape keeping its current shape and ADDING the child
+ * own window’s shape keeping its current shape and ADDING the child
  * shapes to it.
  * 
  * - Raster
diff --git a/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c b/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
index bc1ecbb..33f935a 100644
--- a/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
+++ b/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
  * stages of the GLib main loop (prepare, check, dispatch), and make the
  * appropriate calls into GLib.
  *
- * Both cases share a single problem: the OS X API's don't allow us to
+ * Both cases share a single problem: the OS X API’s don't allow us to
  * wait simultaneously for file descriptors and for events. So when we
  * need to do a blocking wait that includes file descriptor activity, we
  * push the actual work of calling select() to a helper thread (the
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ static GQueue *current_events;
 
 /* The default poll function for GLib; we replace this with our own
  * Cocoa-aware version and then call the old version to do actual
- * file descriptor polling. There's no actual need to chain to the
+ * file descriptor polling. There’s no actual need to chain to the
  * old one; we could reimplement the same functionality from scratch,
  * but since the default implementation does the right thing, why
  * bother.
diff --git a/gdk/quartz/gdkwindow-quartz.c b/gdk/quartz/gdkwindow-quartz.c
index f3d168b..fe798e5 100644
--- a/gdk/quartz/gdkwindow-quartz.c
+++ b/gdk/quartz/gdkwindow-quartz.c
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ gdk_window_impl_quartz_finalize (GObject *object)
  * a view) too often. We do this by limiting the manual flushing done
  * outside of expose calls to less than some frequency when measured over
  * the last 4 flushes. This is a bit arbitray, but seems to make it possible
- * for some quick manual flushes (such as gtkruler or gimp's marching ants)
+ * for some quick manual flushes (such as gtkruler or gimp’s marching ants)
  * without hitting the max flush frequency.
  *
  * If drawable NULL, no flushing is done, only registering that a flush was
@@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ gdk_window_quartz_reparent (GdkWindow *window,
 }
 
 /* Get the toplevel ordering from NSApp and update our own list. We do
- * this on demand since the NSApp's list is not up to date directly
+ * this on demand since the NSApp’s list is not up to date directly
  * after we get windowDidBecomeMain.
  */
 static void
diff --git a/gdk/win32/gdkdnd-win32.c b/gdk/win32/gdkdnd-win32.c
index 6b35059..d74e74c 100644
--- a/gdk/win32/gdkdnd-win32.c
+++ b/gdk/win32/gdkdnd-win32.c
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
  *
  * As such, the data type conversion from gdk selection targets to OLE2 CF_* data
  * type specifiers is partially hardwired. Fixing this is complicated by (a) the
- * fact that the widget's declared selection types aren't accessible in calls here
+ * fact that the widget’s declared selection types aren't accessible in calls here
  * that need to declare the corresponding OLE2 data types, and (b) there isn't a
  * 1-1 correspondence between gdk target types and OLE2 types. The former needs
  * some redesign in gtk dnd (something a gdk/gtk expert should do; I have tried
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ get_suggested_action (DWORD grfKeyState)
 }
 
 /* Process pending events -- we don't want to service non-GUI events
- * forever so do one iteration and then do more only if there's a
+ * forever so do one iteration and then do more only if there’s a
  * pending GDK event.
  */
 static void
diff --git a/gdk/win32/gdkevents-win32.c b/gdk/win32/gdkevents-win32.c
index 6106318..9757da8 100644
--- a/gdk/win32/gdkevents-win32.c
+++ b/gdk/win32/gdkevents-win32.c
@@ -1009,13 +1009,13 @@ apply_event_filters (GdkWindow  *window,
  * On Windows, transient windows will not have their own taskbar entries.
  * Because of this, we must hide and restore groups of transients in both
  * directions.  That is, all transient children must be hidden or restored
- * with this window, but if this window's transient owner also has a
- * transient owner then this window's transient owner must be hidden/restored
+ * with this window, but if this window’s transient owner also has a
+ * transient owner then this window’s transient owner must be hidden/restored
  * with this one.  And etc, up the chain until we hit an ancestor that has no
  * transient owner.
  *
  * It would be a good idea if applications don't chain transient windows
- * together.  There's a limit to how much evil GTK can try to shield you
+ * together.  There’s a limit to how much evil GTK can try to shield you
  * from.
  */
 static void
diff --git a/gdk/win32/gdkmain-win32.c b/gdk/win32/gdkmain-win32.c
index 81b7455..459b0f5 100644
--- a/gdk/win32/gdkmain-win32.c
+++ b/gdk/win32/gdkmain-win32.c
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ _gdk_other_api_failed (const gchar *where,
  * have to be g_free()d. The buffer is of bounded size and reused
  * cyclically. Thus the return value is valid only until that part of
  * the buffer happens to get reused. This doesn't matter as this
- * function's return value is used in debugging output right after the call,
+ * function’s return value is used in debugging output right after the call,
  * and the return value isn't used after that.
  */
 static gchar *
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
index 3a6534f..b12a80d 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ static guint theme_serial = 0;
 /* cursor_cache holds a cache of non-pixmap cursors to avoid expensive 
  * libXcursor searches, cursors are added to it but only removed when
  * their display is closed. We make the assumption that since there are 
- * a small number of display's and a small number of cursor's that this 
+ * a small number of display’s and a small number of cursor’s that this 
  * list will stay small enough not to be a problem.
  */
 static GSList* cursor_cache = NULL;
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
index 5a157a5..cd2215a 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
@@ -1981,9 +1981,9 @@ gdk_x11_lookup_xdisplay (Display *xdisplay)
 /**
  * _gdk_x11_display_screen_for_xrootwin:
  * @display: a #GdkDisplay
- * @xrootwin: window ID for one of of the screen's of the display.
+ * @xrootwin: window ID for one of of the screen’s of the display.
  * 
- * Given the root window ID of one of the screen's of a #GdkDisplay,
+ * Given the root window ID of one of the screen’s of a #GdkDisplay,
  * finds the screen.
  * 
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen corresponding to
@@ -2473,7 +2473,7 @@ gdk_x11_register_standard_event_type (GdkDisplay *display,
 }
 
 /* look up the extension name for a given major opcode.  grubs around in
- * xlib to do it since a) it's already cached there b) XQueryExtension
+ * xlib to do it since a) it’s already cached there b) XQueryExtension
  * emits protocol so we can't use it in an error handler.
  */
 static const char *
@@ -2788,8 +2788,8 @@ gdk_x11_display_error_trap_pop_ignored (GdkDisplay *display)
  * @sm_client_id: the client id assigned by the session manager when the
  *    connection was opened, or %NULL to remove the property.
  *
- * Sets the `SM_CLIENT_ID` property on the application's leader window so that
- * the window manager can save the application's state using the X11R6 ICCCM
+ * Sets the `SM_CLIENT_ID` property on the application’s leader window so that
+ * the window manager can save the application’s state using the X11R6 ICCCM
  * session management protocol.
  *
  * See the X Session Management Library documentation for more information on
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkkeys-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkkeys-x11.c
index 2af3898..5d0c86e 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkkeys-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkkeys-x11.c
@@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ gdk_x11_keymap_lookup_key (GdkKeymap          *keymap,
  *  - add the group and level return.
  *  - change the interpretation of mods_rtrn as described
  *    in the docs for gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state()
- * It's unchanged for ease of diff against the Xlib sources; don't
+ * It’s unchanged for ease of diff against the Xlib sources; don't
  * reformat it.
  */
 static Bool
@@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ gdk_x11_keymap_add_virtual_modifiers (GdkKeymap       *keymap,
  * @keycode: the hardware keycode from a key event
  *
  * Determines whether a particular key code represents a key that
- * is a modifier. That is, it's a key that normally just affects
+ * is a modifier. That is, it’s a key that normally just affects
  * the keyboard state and the behavior of other keys rather than
  * producing a direct effect itself. This is only needed for code
  * processing raw X events, since #GdkEventKey directly includes
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
index 70d29ef..33a48b1 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
@@ -383,11 +383,11 @@ _gdk_x11_get_xatom_for_display_printf (GdkDisplay    *display,
  * gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name:
  * @atom_name: a string
  * 
- * Returns the X atom for GDK's default display corresponding to @atom_name.
+ * Returns the X atom for GDK’s default display corresponding to @atom_name.
  * This function caches the result, so if called repeatedly it is much
  * faster than XInternAtom(), which is a round trip to the server each time.
  * 
- * Return value: a X atom for GDK's default display.
+ * Return value: a X atom for GDK’s default display.
  **/
 Atom
 gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name (const gchar *atom_name)
@@ -422,9 +422,9 @@ gdk_x11_get_xatom_name_for_display (GdkDisplay *display,
 
 /**
  * gdk_x11_get_xatom_name:
- * @xatom: an X atom for GDK's default display
+ * @xatom: an X atom for GDK’s default display
  * 
- * Returns the name of an X atom for GDK's default display. This
+ * Returns the name of an X atom for GDK’s default display. This
  * function is meant mainly for debugging, so for convenience, unlike
  * XAtomName() and gdk_atom_name(), the result 
  * doesn't need to be freed. Also, this function will never return %NULL, 
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
index 788b57e..09ddb43 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
@@ -5521,7 +5521,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_server_time (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Returns the X resource (window) belonging to a #GdkWindow.
  * 
- * Return value: the ID of @drawable's X resource.
+ * Return value: the ID of @drawable’s X resource.
  **/
 XID
 gdk_x11_window_get_xid (GdkWindow *window)
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
index b9630ae..0a6d672 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
  *
  * Each action can have one or more proxy widgets. To act as an action proxy,
  * widget needs to implement #GtkActivatable interface. Proxies mirror the state
- * of the action and should change when the action's state changes. Properties
+ * of the action and should change when the action’s state changes. Properties
  * that are always mirrored by proxies are #GtkAction:sensitive and
  * #GtkAction:visible. #GtkAction:gicon, #GtkAction:icon-name, #GtkAction:label,
  * #GtkAction:short-label and #GtkAction:stock-id properties are only mirorred
@@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ gtk_action_get_is_important (GtkAction *action)
  * @action: a #GtkAction
  * @always_show: %TRUE if menuitem proxies should always show their image
  *
- * Sets whether @action<!-- -->'s menu item proxies will ignore the
+ * Sets whether @action<!-- -->’s menu item proxies will ignore the
  * #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images setting and always show their image, if available.
  *
  * Use this if the menu item would be useless or hard to use
@@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ gtk_action_set_always_show_image (GtkAction *action,
  * gtk_action_get_always_show_image:
  * @action: a #GtkAction
  *
- * Returns whether @action<!-- -->'s menu item proxies will always
+ * Returns whether @action<!-- -->’s menu item proxies will always
  * show their image, if available.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the menu item proxies will always show their image
@@ -1835,7 +1835,7 @@ gtk_action_set_gicon (GtkAction *action,
  *
  * Gets the gicon of @action.
  *
- * Returns: (transfer none): The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The action’s #GIcon if one is set.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
index 16dde2a..6b9b9ad 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
  * application that can edit multiple documents, one group holding global
  * actions (e.g. quit, about, new), and one group per document holding
  * actions that act on that document (eg. save, cut/copy/paste, etc). Each
- * window's menus would be constructed from a combination of two action
+ * window’s menus would be constructed from a combination of two action
  * groups.
  *
  * ## Accelerators ## {#Action-Accel}
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.c
index 3d36e39..f214b4a 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.c
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ gtk_activatable_action_notify (GtkAction      *action,
  * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
  * action for you, it also makes sure the #GtkActivatable->update()
  * method is called when the related #GtkAction properties change
- * and registers to the action's proxy list.
+ * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
  *
  * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
  * > copy of the #GtkAction property, since this function uses 
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.h b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.h
index dd89d85..612dbba 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.h
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactivatable.h
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkActivatableIface GtkActivatableIface;
 
 /**
  * GtkActivatableIface:
- * @update: Called to update the activatable when its related action's properties change.
+ * @update: Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
  * You must check the #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property only apply action
  * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
  * @sync_action_properties: Called to update the activatable completely, this is called internally when
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorseldialog.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorseldialog.c
index 18c651a..7ff28ec 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorseldialog.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorseldialog.c
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
  * #GtkColorSelection widget contained within the dialog. Use this widget
  * and its gtk_color_selection_get_current_color()
  * function to gain access to the selected color.  Connect a handler
- * for this widget's #GtkColorSelection::color-changed signal to be notified
+ * for this widget’s #GtkColorSelection::color-changed signal to be notified
  * when the color changes.
  *
  * # GtkColorSelectionDialog as GtkBuildable # {#GtkColorSelectionDialog-BUILDER-UI}
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkgradient.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkgradient.c
index e8759e0..7021d14 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkgradient.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkgradient.c
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
  * since they are mostly used behind the scenes by #GtkStyleContext and
  * #GtkCssProvider.
  *
- * #GtkGradient is deprecated. It was used internally by GTK's CSS engine
+ * #GtkGradient is deprecated. It was used internally by GTK’s CSS engine
  * to represent gradients. As its handling is not conforming to modern
  * web standards, it is not used anymore. If you want to use gradients in
  * your own code, please use Cairo directly.
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
index 36a7883..3987c19 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge (GtkHandleBox *handle_box)
  * gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached:
  * @handle_box: a #GtkHandleBox
  *
- * Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
+ * Whether the handlebox’s child is currently detached.
  *
  * Return value: %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
index 57d36ad..58aa6e8 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ G_GNUC_BEGIN_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS
  * a horizontal slider. To create one, use gtk_hscale_new_with_range().
  *
  * The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places
- * shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class's functions.
+ * shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class’s functions.
  *
  * GtkHScale has been deprecated, use #GtkScale instead.
  */
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ gtk_hscale_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
  *
  * Creates a new horizontal scale widget that lets the user input a
  * number between @min and @max (including @min and @max) with the
- * increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
+ * increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it’s the distance the
  * slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale value.
  *
  * Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
index b77c649..efa7eb0 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ gtk_icon_factory_new (void)
  * gtk_icon_factory_add_default(). Then they pass the @stock_id to
  * widgets such as #GtkImage to display the icon. Themes can provide
  * an icon with the same name (such as "myapp-whatever-icon") to
- * override your application's default icons. If an icon already
+ * override your application’s default icons. If an icon already
  * existed in @factory for @stock_id, it is unreferenced and replaced
  * with the new @icon_set.
  *
@@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ icon_source_compare (gconstpointer ap, gconstpointer bp)
  * This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
  * without affecting the icon set.
  *
- * An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
+ * An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser’s "Back
  * to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
  * Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
  * and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
@@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_get_sizes (GtkIconSet   *icon_set,
  * a set of icons that represent “the same” logical concept in different states,
  * different global text directions, and different sizes.
  *
- * So for example a web browser's “Back to Previous Page” icon might
+ * So for example a web browser’s “Back to Previous Page” icon might
  * point in a different direction in Hebrew and in English; it might
  * look different when insensitive; and it might change size depending
  * on toolbar mode (small/large icons). So a single icon set would
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
index 8c27040..6a30f9e 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@
  * `"gtk-button"`, `"gtk-dialog"`. Applications
  * can define other sizes.
  *
- * It's also possible to use custom icons for a given state, for example:
+ * It’s also possible to use custom icons for a given state, for example:
  *
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  * stock["my-stock-item"] =
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
index 245d213..e0bdccd 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Prebuilt common menu/toolbar items and corresponding icons
  * of the menu or toolbar item; and/or with an icon stored in a
  * #GtkIconFactory. The connection between a
  * #GtkStockItem and stock icons is purely conventional (by virtue of
- * using the same stock ID); it's possible to register a stock item but
+ * using the same stock ID); it’s possible to register a stock item but
  * no icon, and vice versa. Stock icons may have a RTL variant which gets
  * used for right-to-left locales.
  */
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
index bf2a5eb..3fb461c 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
@@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ gtk_style_has_context (GtkStyle *style)
  * @window: a #GdkWindow.
  *
  * Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
- * colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+ * colors and creates the GC’s for the style - it specializes
  * it to a particular visual. The process may involve the creation
  * of a new style if the style has already been attached to a
  * window with a different style and visual.
@@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ gtk_style_lookup_icon_set (GtkStyle   *style,
  * @color_name: the name of the logical color to look up
  * @color: (out): the #GdkColor to fill in
  *
- * Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+ * Looks up @color_name in the style’s logical color mappings,
  * filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
  * returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
  * it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
@@ -4063,14 +4063,14 @@ gtk_widget_get_default_style (void)
  * gtk_widget_style_attach:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
- * This function attaches the widget's #GtkStyle to the widget's
+ * This function attaches the widget’s #GtkStyle to the widget's
  * #GdkWindow. It is a replacement for
  *
  * |[
  * widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
  * ]|
  *
- * and should only ever be called in a derived widget's “realize”
+ * and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
  * implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
  * “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
  * (finally #GtkWidget) would attach the style itself.
@@ -4160,7 +4160,7 @@ gtk_widget_ensure_style (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Simply an accessor function that returns @widget->style.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget's #GtkStyle
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the widget’s #GtkStyle
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use #GtkStyleContext instead
  */
@@ -4375,7 +4375,7 @@ gtk_widget_modify_fg (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
  *
  * > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
- * > flag set) draw on their parent container's window and thus may
+ * > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
  * > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
  * > #GtkLabel.
  * >
@@ -4473,7 +4473,7 @@ gtk_widget_modify_text (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
  *
  * > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
- * > flag set) draw on their parent container's window and thus may
+ * > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
  * > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
  * > #GtkLabel.
  * >
@@ -4600,8 +4600,8 @@ gtk_widget_reset_rc_styles (GtkWidget *widget)
  * the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
  * styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
  * file. @path_reversed_p fills in the path in reverse order,
- * i.e. starting with @widget's name instead of starting with the name
- * of @widget's outermost ancestor.
+ * i.e. starting with @widget’s name instead of starting with the name
+ * of @widget’s outermost ancestor.
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use gtk_widget_get_path() instead
  **/
@@ -4670,7 +4670,7 @@ gtk_widget_path (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @path_reversed: (out) (allow-none): location to store the reverse
  *     class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
  *
- * Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
+ * Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
  * never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use gtk_widget_get_path() instead
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
index c006e87..4af47c4 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ gtk_table_new (guint        rows,
  * @rows: The new number of rows.
  * @columns: The new number of columns.
  *
- * If you need to change a table's size after
+ * If you need to change a table’s size after
  * it has been created, this function allows you to do so.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid resizes automatically.
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
index a8cd171..3944383 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ G_GNUC_BEGIN_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS
  * a vertical slider. To create one, use gtk_hscale_new_with_range().
  *
  * The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places
- * shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class's functions.
+ * shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class’s functions.
  *
  * GtkVScale has been deprecated, use #GtkScale instead.
  */
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ gtk_vscale_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
  *
  * Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
  * number between @min and @max (including @min and @max) with the
- * increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
+ * increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it’s the distance the
  * slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale value.
  *
  * Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c b/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
index 3e17c33..736b7b7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
@@ -2378,7 +2378,7 @@ close_cb (GtkAboutDialog *about)
  * @first_property_name: the name of the first property
  * @...: value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
  *
- * This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+ * This is a convenience function for showing an application’s about box.
  * The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
  * reused for future invocations of this function.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaccelgroup.c b/gtk/gtkaccelgroup.c
index 8b2c696..15fa061 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaccelgroup.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaccelgroup.c
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
  * gtk_window_add_accel_group()). Usually you won't need to create a
  * #GtkAccelGroup directly; instead, when using #GtkUIManager, GTK+
  * automatically sets up the accelerators for your menus in the ui
- * manager's #GtkAccelGroup.
+ * manager’s #GtkAccelGroup.
  *
  * Note that “accelerators” are different from
  * “mnemonics”. Accelerators are shortcuts for
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c b/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
index c5819d5..ff6e417 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
  * “Gimp-Image”, “Abiword-Document” or “Gnumeric-Settings”.
  * The “Category1/.../Action” portion is most appropriately chosen by
  * the action the accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu
- * items, choose the item's menu path, e.g. “File/Save As”,
+ * items, choose the item’s menu path, e.g. “File/Save As”,
  * “Image/View/Zoom” or “Edit/Select All”. So a full valid accelerator
  * path may look like: “&lt;Gimp-Toolbox&gt;/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...”.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaccessible.c b/gtk/gtkaccessible.c
index 5845a00..e8fe6ca 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaccessible.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaccessible.c
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ gtk_accessible_class_init (GtkAccessibleClass *klass)
  * Sets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible.
  *
  * @accessible will not hold a reference to @widget.
- * It is the caller's responsibility to ensure that when @widget
+ * It is the caller’s responsibility to ensure that when @widget
  * is destroyed, the widget is unset by calling this function
  * again with @widget set to %NULL.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkactionable.c b/gtk/gtkactionable.c
index 2be4783..12f8758 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkactionable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkactionable.c
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ gtk_actionable_get_action_target_value (GtkActionable *actionable)
  * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
  * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
  * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
- * the action's state to change to that value.  Since the action's state
+ * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
  * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
  * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
  * rendered inactive).
diff --git a/gtk/gtkadjustment.c b/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
index 3173d2e..f550500 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_get_lower (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
  * When setting multiple adjustment properties via their individual
  * setters, multiple #GtkAdjustment::changed signals will be emitted. However, since
  * the emission of the #GtkAdjustment::changed signal is tied to the emission of the
- * #GObject::notify signals of the changed properties, it's possible
+ * #GObject::notify signals of the changed properties, it’s possible
  * to compress the #GtkAdjustment::changed signals into one by calling
  * g_object_freeze_notify() and g_object_thaw_notify() around the
  * calls to the individual setters.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.h b/gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.h
index 19aba13..9b0625a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkappchooserwidget.h
@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ struct _GtkAppChooserWidget {
  * GtkAppChooserWidgetClass:
  * @parent_class: The parent class.
  * @application_selected: Signal emitted when an application item is
- *    selected from the widget's list.
+ *    selected from the widget’s list.
  * @application_activated: Signal emitted when an application item is
- *    activated from the widget's list.
+ *    activated from the widget’s list.
  * @populate_popup: Signal emitted when a context menu is about to
  *    popup over an application item.
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkassistant.c b/gtk/gtkassistant.c
index c83790d..25d6e18 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkassistant.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkassistant.c
@@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ gtk_assistant_insert_page (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  * @page_num: the index of a page in the @assistant,
  *     or -1 to remove the last page
  *
- * Removes the @page_num's page from @assistant.
+ * Removes the @page_num’s page from @assistant.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -2164,7 +2164,7 @@ gtk_assistant_do_set_page_header_image (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  * Gets the header image for @page.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the header image for @page,
- *     or %NULL if there's no header image for the page
+ *     or %NULL if there’s no header image for the page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -2255,7 +2255,7 @@ gtk_assistant_do_set_page_side_image (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  * Gets the side image for @page.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the side image for @page,
- *     or %NULL if there's no side image for the page
+ *     or %NULL if there’s no side image for the page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkassistant.h b/gtk/gtkassistant.h
index 1a70e70..0f9de28 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkassistant.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkassistant.h
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ struct _GtkAssistant
 /**
  * GtkAssistantClass:
  * @parent_class: The parent class.
- * @prepare: Signal emitted when a new page is set as the assistant's current page, before making the new 
page visible.
+ * @prepare: Signal emitted when a new page is set as the assistant’s current page, before making the new 
page visible.
  * @apply: Signal emitted when the apply button is clicked.
  * @close: Signal emitted either when the close button or last page apply button is clicked.
  * @cancel: Signal emitted when the cancel button is clicked.
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ struct _GtkAssistantClass
  * @data: (closure): user data.
  *
  * A function used by gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func() to know which
- * is the next page given a current one. It's called both for computing the
+ * is the next page given a current one. It’s called both for computing the
  * next page when the user presses the “forward” button and for handling
  * the behavior of the “last” button.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbindings.c b/gtk/gtkbindings.c
index 7720384..6b0da96 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbindings.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbindings.c
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@
  * and “&lt;Control&gt;Left” key presses before it resorts to its default
  * bindings, and the match instructs it to abort (“unbind”) the search,
  * so the key presses are not consumed by this widget. As usual, further
- * processing of the key presses, e.g. by an entry's parent widget, is
+ * processing of the key presses, e.g. by an entry’s parent widget, is
  * now possible.
  */
 
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbox.c b/gtk/gtkbox.c
index 4a06134..16ef16c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbox.c
@@ -1571,7 +1571,7 @@ gtk_box_get_preferred_height_for_width (GtkWidget *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_box_new:
- * @orientation: the box's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the box’s orientation.
  * @spacing: the number of pixels to place by default between children.
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkBox.
@@ -1835,7 +1835,7 @@ _gtk_box_get_spacing_set (GtkBox *box)
  * as well as widgets packed #GTK_PACK_END, in the order that these
  * widgets were added to @box.
  *
- * A widget's position in the @box children list determines where
+ * A widget’s position in the @box children list determines where
  * the widget is packed into @box.  A child widget at some position
  * in the list will be packed just after all other widgets of the
  * same packing type that appear earlier in the list.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbuilder.c b/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
index b2893e9..e928baf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
  * respective objects.
  *
  * Additionally, since 3.10 a special &lt;template&gt; tag has been
- * added to the format allowing one to define a widget class's components.
+ * added to the format allowing one to define a widget class’s components.
  */
 
 #include "config.h"
@@ -955,10 +955,10 @@ gtk_builder_new (void)
  * #GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR 
  * domain.
  *
- * It's not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
+ * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
  * call.  You should not use this function with untrusted files (ie:
  * files that are not part of your application).  Broken #GtkBuilder
- * files can easily crash your program, and it's possible that memory
+ * files can easily crash your program, and it’s possible that memory
  * was leaked leading up to the reported failure.  The only reasonable
  * thing to do when an error is detected is to call g_error().
  *
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ _gtk_builder_extend_with_template (GtkBuilder    *builder,
  * #GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_RESOURCE_ERROR
  * domain.
  *
- * It's not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
+ * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
  * call.  The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is
  * to call g_error().
  *
@@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ gtk_builder_add_objects_from_resource (GtkBuilder   *builder,
  * Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
  * #GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
  *
- * It's not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
+ * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
  * call.  The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is
  * to call g_error().
  *
@@ -1562,8 +1562,8 @@ gtk_builder_connect_signals_default (GtkBuilder    *builder,
  * This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
  * It uses symbols explicitly added to @builder with prior calls to
  * gtk_builder_add_callback_symbol(). In the case that symbols are not
- * explicitly added; it uses #GModule's introspective features (by opening the module %NULL) 
- * to look at the application's symbol table. From here it tries to match
+ * explicitly added; it uses #GModule’s introspective features (by opening the module %NULL) 
+ * to look at the application’s symbol table. From here it tries to match
  * the signal handler names given in the interface description with
  * symbols in the application and connects the signals. Note that this
  * function can only be called once, subsequent calls will do nothing.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbuilder.h b/gtk/gtkbuilder.h
index 38e63a5..65c6276 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbuilder.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkbuilder.h
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkBuilderPrivate GtkBuilderPrivate;
  * @GTK_BUILDER_ERROR_DUPLICATE_ID: An object id occurred twice.
  * @GTK_BUILDER_ERROR_OBJECT_TYPE_REFUSED: A specified object type is of the same type or
  *  derived from the type of the composite class being extended with builder XML.
- * @GTK_BUILDER_ERROR_TEMPLATE_MISMATCH: The wrong type was specified in a composite class's template XML
+ * @GTK_BUILDER_ERROR_TEMPLATE_MISMATCH: The wrong type was specified in a composite class’s template XML
  *
  * Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using
  * #GtkBuilder.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbutton.c b/gtk/gtkbutton.c
index a999985..0a3d820 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbutton.c
@@ -2895,10 +2895,10 @@ gtk_button_get_always_show_image (GtkButton *button)
  * gtk_button_get_event_window:
  * @button: a #GtkButton
  *
- * Returns the button's event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
+ * Returns the button’s event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
  * This function should be rarely needed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): @button's event window.
+ * Return value: (transfer none): @button’s event window.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellarea.c b/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
index 1c41e21..7b283d6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
  * # Requesting area sizes
  *
  * As outlined in
- * [GtkWidget's geometry management section][geometry-management],
+ * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management],
  * GTK+ uses a height-for-width
  * geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user
  * interfaces. #GtkCellArea uses the same semantics to calculate the
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
  * width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell
  * areas when allocated less width.
  *
- * It's also important for areas to maintain some cell
+ * It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell
  * alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can
  * appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of
  * cells are different in each row). For this reason the #GtkCellArea
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
  * The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as
  * it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the
  * same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically),
- * However, it's important that the same #GtkCellAreaContext which
+ * However, it’s important that the same #GtkCellAreaContext which
  * was used to request the sizes for a given #GtkTreeModel row be
  * used when rendering or processing events for that row.
  *
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@
  * gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (context, &minimum_width, &natural_width);
  * ]|
  *
- * Note that in this example it's not important to observe the
+ * Note that in this example it’s not important to observe the
  * returned minimum and natural width of the area for each row
  * unless the cell-layouting object is actually interested in the
  * widths of individual rows. The overall width is however stored
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@
  * Requesting the height for width (or width for height) of an area is
  * a similar task except in this case the #GtkCellAreaContext does not
  * store the data (actually, it does not know how much space the layouting
- * widget plans to allocate it for every row. It's up to the layouting
+ * widget plans to allocate it for every row. It’s up to the layouting
  * widget to render each row of data with the appropriate height and
  * width which was requested by the #GtkCellArea).
  *
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@
  * In some cases the layouting widget is requested the height for an
  * arbitrary for_width, this is a special case for layouting widgets
  * who need to request size for tens of thousands  of rows. For this
- * case it's only important that the layouting widget calculate
+ * case it’s only important that the layouting widget calculate
  * one reasonably sized chunk of rows and return that height
  * synchronously. The reasoning here is that any layouting widget is
  * at least capable of synchronously calculating enough height to fill
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@
  *
  * The #GtkCellArea drives keyboard focus from cell to cell in a way
  * similar to #GtkWidget. For layouting widgets that support giving
- * focus to cells it's important to remember to pass %GTK_CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED
+ * focus to cells it’s important to remember to pass %GTK_CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED
  * to the area functions for the row that has focus and to tell the
  * area to paint the focus at render time.
  *
@@ -1822,12 +1822,12 @@ gtk_cell_area_event (GtkCellArea          *area,
  * @context: the #GtkCellAreaContext for this row of data.
  * @widget: the #GtkWidget that @area is rendering to
  * @cr: the #cairo_t to render with
- * @background_area: the @widget relative coordinates for @area's background
+ * @background_area: the @widget relative coordinates for @area’s background
  * @cell_area: the @widget relative coordinates for @area
  * @flags: the #GtkCellRendererState for @area in this row.
  * @paint_focus: whether @area should paint focus on focused cells for focused rows or not.
  *
- * Renders @area's cells according to @area's layout onto @widget at
+ * Renders @area’s cells according to @area’s layout onto @widget at
  * the given coordinates.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -2057,10 +2057,10 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_request_mode (GtkCellArea *area)
  * @minimum_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
  * @natural_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural width, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a cell area's initial minimum and natural width.
+ * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural width.
  *
  * @area will store some geometrical information in @context along the way;
- * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it's not important
+ * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
  * to check the @minimum_width and @natural_width of this call but rather to
  * consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width() after a series of
  * requests.
@@ -2090,11 +2090,11 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * @minimum_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum height, or %NULL
  * @natural_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural height, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a cell area's minimum and natural height if it would be given
+ * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
  * the specified @width.
  *
  * @area stores some geometrical information in @context along the way
- * while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width(). It's important to
+ * while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width(). It’s important to
  * perform a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() requests with
  * @context first and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width()
  * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
@@ -2133,10 +2133,10 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * @minimum_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum height, or %NULL
  * @natural_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural height, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a cell area's initial minimum and natural height.
+ * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural height.
  *
  * @area will store some geometrical information in @context along the way;
- * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it's not important
+ * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
  * to check the @minimum_height and @natural_height of this call but rather to
  * consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height() after a series of
  * requests.
@@ -2166,11 +2166,11 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * @minimum_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
  * @natural_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural width, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a cell area's minimum and natural width if it would be given
+ * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
  * the specified @height.
  *
  * @area stores some geometrical information in @context along the way
- * while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height(). It's important to
+ * while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height(). It’s important to
  * perform a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() requests with
  * @context first and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width_for_height()
  * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
@@ -2869,7 +2869,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_is_activatable (GtkCellArea *area)
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @direction: the #GtkDirectionType
  *
- * This should be called by the @area's owning layout widget
+ * This should be called by the @area’s owning layout widget
  * when focus is to be passed to @area, or moved within @area
  * for a given @direction and row data.
  *
@@ -2895,7 +2895,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_focus (GtkCellArea      *area,
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @context: the #GtkCellAreaContext in context with the current row data
  * @widget: the #GtkWidget that @area is rendering on
- * @cell_area: the size and location of @area relative to @widget's allocation
+ * @cell_area: the size and location of @area relative to @widget’s allocation
  * @flags: the #GtkCellRendererState flags for @area for this row of data.
  * @edit_only: if %TRUE then only cell renderers that are %GTK_CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE
  *             will be activated.
@@ -2999,9 +2999,9 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_focus_cell (GtkCellArea *area)
  * gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling:
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @renderer: the #GtkCellRenderer expected to have focus
- * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to add to @renderer's focus area
+ * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to add to @renderer’s focus area
  *
- * Adds @sibling to @renderer's focusable area, focus will be drawn
+ * Adds @sibling to @renderer’s focusable area, focus will be drawn
  * around @renderer and all of its siblings if @renderer can
  * focus for a given row.
  *
@@ -3048,9 +3048,9 @@ gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling (GtkCellArea     *area,
  * gtk_cell_area_remove_focus_sibling:
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @renderer: the #GtkCellRenderer expected to have focus
- * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to remove from @renderer's focus area
+ * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to remove from @renderer’s focus area
  *
- * Removes @sibling from @renderer's focus sibling list
+ * Removes @sibling from @renderer’s focus sibling list
  * (see gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()).
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -3085,9 +3085,9 @@ gtk_cell_area_remove_focus_sibling (GtkCellArea     *area,
  * gtk_cell_area_is_focus_sibling:
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @renderer: the #GtkCellRenderer expected to have focus
- * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to check against @renderer's sibling list
+ * @sibling: the #GtkCellRenderer to check against @renderer’s sibling list
  *
- * Returns whether @sibling is one of @renderer's focus siblings
+ * Returns whether @sibling is one of @renderer’s focus siblings
  * (see gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()).
  *
  * Return value: %TRUE if @sibling is a focus sibling of @renderer
@@ -3505,7 +3505,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_stop_editing (GtkCellArea *area,
  * gtk_cell_area_inner_cell_area:
  * @area: a #GtkCellArea
  * @widget: the #GtkWidget that @area is rendering onto
- * @cell_area: the @widget relative coordinates where one of @area's cells
+ * @cell_area: the @widget relative coordinates where one of @area’s cells
  *             is to be placed
  * @inner_area: (out): the return location for the inner cell area
  *
@@ -3550,7 +3550,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_inner_cell_area (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural size, or %NULL
  *
  * This is a convenience function for #GtkCellArea implementations
- * to request size for cell renderers. It's important to use this
+ * to request size for cell renderers. It’s important to use this
  * function to request size and then use gtk_cell_area_inner_cell_area()
  * at render and event time since this function will add padding
  * around the cell for focus painting.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellarea.h b/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
index ebb20a9..d82b2cf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ struct _GtkCellArea
  * @event: Handle an event in the area, this is generally used to activate
  *     a cell at the event location for button events but can also be used
  *     to generically pass events to #GtkWidgets drawn onto the area.
- * @render: Actually render the area's cells to the specified rectangle,
+ * @render: Actually render the area’s cells to the specified rectangle,
  *     @background_area should be correctly distributed to the cells
  *     corresponding background areas.
  * @apply_attributes: Apply the cell attributes to the cells. This is
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
index e90abc7..f704e95 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
  * #GtkTreeModel rows that are requested and rendered in the same context.
  *
  * #GtkCellLayout widgets can create any number of contexts in which to
- * request and render groups of data rows. However, it's important that the
+ * request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the
  * same context which was used to request sizes for a given #GtkTreeModel
  * row also be used for the same row when calling other #GtkCellArea APIs
  * such as gtk_cell_area_render() and gtk_cell_area_event().
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_context_real_allocate (GtkCellAreaContext *context,
  * fetch information about the area it is being used for.
  *
  * For instance at #GtkCellAreaContextClass.allocate() time
- * it's important to know details about any cell spacing
+ * it’s important to know details about any cell spacing
  * that the #GtkCellArea is configured with in order to
  * compute a proper allocation.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.h b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.h
index cf35a62..c9f19c1 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.h
@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ struct _GtkCellAreaContext
  * @reset: Clear any previously stored information about requested and
  *     allocated sizes for the context.
  * @get_preferred_height_for_width: Returns the aligned height for the given
- *     width that context must store while collecting sizes for it's rows.
+ *     width that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.
  * @get_preferred_width_for_height: Returns the aligned width for the given
- *     height that context must store while collecting sizes for it's rows.
+ *     height that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.
  */
 struct _GtkCellAreaContextClass
 {
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcelllayout.h b/gtk/gtkcelllayout.h
index a0e17d5..13cd9b2 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcelllayout.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcelllayout.h
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkCellLayoutIface      GtkCellLayoutIface;
  * @iter: a #GtkTreeIter indicating the row to set the value for
  * @data: user data passed to gtk_cell_layout_set_cell_data_func()
  *
- * A function which should set the value of @cell_layout's cell renderer(s)
+ * A function which should set the value of @cell_layout’s cell renderer(s)
  * as appropriate. 
  */
 typedef void (* GtkCellLayoutDataFunc) (GtkCellLayout   *cell_layout,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
index e726722..b58f66c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
  * is rendered in the correct location using gtk_cell_renderer_render().
  *
  * There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new
- * #GtkCellRenderer.  First and foremost, it's important that a certain set
+ * #GtkCellRenderer.  First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set
  * of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size,
  * barring a #GtkStyle change.  The #GtkCellRenderer also has a number of
  * generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.
@@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_fixed_size (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @xalign: the x alignment of the cell renderer
  * @yalign: the y alignment of the cell renderer
  *
- * Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+ * Sets the renderer’s alignment within its available space.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @xpad: the x padding of the cell renderer
  * @ypad: the y padding of the cell renderer
  *
- * Sets the renderer's padding.
+ * Sets the renderer’s padding.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @cell: A #GtkCellRenderer
  * @visible: the visibility of the cell
  *
- * Sets the cell renderer's visibility.
+ * Sets the cell renderer’s visibility.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_set_visible (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * gtk_cell_renderer_get_visible:
  * @cell: A #GtkCellRenderer
  *
- * Returns the cell renderer's visibility.
+ * Returns the cell renderer’s visibility.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is visible
  *
@@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_visible (GtkCellRenderer *cell)
  * @cell: A #GtkCellRenderer
  * @sensitive: the sensitivity of the cell
  *
- * Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+ * Sets the cell renderer’s sensitivity.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * gtk_cell_renderer_get_sensitive:
  * @cell: A #GtkCellRenderer
  *
- * Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+ * Returns the cell renderer’s sensitivity.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is sensitive
  *
@@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_request_mode (GtkCellRenderer *cell)
  * @minimum_size: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum size, or %NULL
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural size, or %NULL
  *
- * Retreives a renderer's natural size when rendered to @widget.
+ * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to @widget.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1502,7 +1502,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_width (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @minimum_size: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum size, or %NULL
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural size, or %NULL
  *
- * Retreives a renderer's natural size when rendered to @widget.
+ * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to @widget.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_height (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @minimum_width: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
  * @natural_width: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the preferred size, or %NULL
  *
- * Retreives a cell renderers's minimum and natural width if it were rendered to 
+ * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural width if it were rendered to 
  * @widget with the specified @height.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @minimum_height: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
  * @natural_height: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the preferred size, or %NULL
  *
- * Retreives a cell renderers's minimum and natural height if it were rendered to 
+ * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural height if it were rendered to 
  * @widget with the specified @width.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1651,7 +1651,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_height_for_width (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the natural size, or %NULL
  *
  * Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a cell taking
- * into account the widget's preference for height-for-width management.
+ * into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.h b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.h
index afa45ec..679b21b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.h
@@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ struct _GtkCellRenderer
  * GtkCellRendererClass:
  * @get_request_mode: Called to gets whether the cell renderer prefers
  *    a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.
- * @get_preferred_width: Called to get a renderer's natural width.
- * @get_preferred_height_for_width: Called to get a renderer's natural height for width.
- * @get_preferred_height: Called to get a renderer's natural height.
- * @get_preferred_width_for_height: Called to get a renderer's natural width for height.
+ * @get_preferred_width: Called to get a renderer’s natural width.
+ * @get_preferred_height_for_width: Called to get a renderer’s natural height for width.
+ * @get_preferred_height: Called to get a renderer’s natural height.
+ * @get_preferred_width_for_height: Called to get a renderer’s natural width for height.
  * @get_aligned_area: Called to get the aligned area used by @cell inside @cell_area.
  * @get_size: Called to get the width and height needed to render the cell. Deprecated: 3.0.
  * @render: Called to render the content of the #GtkCellRenderer.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellview.c b/gtk/gtkcellview.c
index d30f6d2..f577dcd 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellview.c
@@ -1435,7 +1435,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_get_fit_model (GtkCellView     *cell_view)
  * Sets whether @cell_view should request space to fit the entire #GtkTreeModel.
  *
  * This is used by #GtkComboBox to ensure that the cell view displayed on
- * the combo box's button always gets enough space and does not resize
+ * the combo box’s button always gets enough space and does not resize
  * when selection changes.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c b/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
index 059b464..54c23bf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic (const gchar *label)
  * @check_menu_item: a #GtkCheckMenuItem.
  * @is_active: boolean value indicating whether the check box is active.
  *
- * Sets the active state of the menu item's check box.
+ * Sets the active state of the menu item’s check box.
  */
 void
 gtk_check_menu_item_set_active (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkclipboard.c b/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
index 99a0713..9c361f4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
  * simply free the data blob. The latter is more useful when the
  * contents of clipboard reflect the internal state of a #GObject
  * (As an example, for the PRIMARY clipboard, when an entry widget
- * provides the clipboard's contents the contents are simply the
+ * provides the clipboard’s contents the contents are simply the
  * text within the selected region.) If the contents change, the
  * entry widget can call gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner() to update
  * the timestamp for clipboard ownership, without having to worry
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ clipboard_display_closed (GdkDisplay   *display,
  * selections under the X window system. On Win32 the
  * #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY clipboard is essentially ignored.)
  *
- * It's possible to have arbitrary named clipboards; if you do invent
+ * It’s possible to have arbitrary named clipboards; if you do invent
  * new clipboards, you should prefix the selection name with an
  * underscore (because the ICCCM requires that nonstandard atoms are
  * underscore-prefixed), and namespace it as well. For example,
@@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ request_rich_text_received_func (GtkClipboard     *clipboard,
  *
  * The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
  * text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
- * parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
+ * parameter will contain @text’s length. This function can fail for
  * various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
  * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
  *
@@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_owner_change (GtkClipboard        *clipboard,
  * function can be used to determine if a “Paste” menu item should be
  * insensitive or not.
  *
- * If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use
+ * If you want to see if there’s text available on the clipboard, use
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
  *
  * Return value: %TRUE if the target is available, %FALSE otherwise.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcombobox.c b/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
index 5a33a01..cf7bbb4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
@@ -4255,14 +4255,14 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_column_span_column (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * gtk_combo_box_get_active:
  * @combo_box: A #GtkComboBox
  *
- * Returns the index of the currently active item, or -1 if there's no
+ * Returns the index of the currently active item, or -1 if there’s no
  * active item. If the model is a non-flat treemodel, and the active item
  * is not an immediate child of the root of the tree, this function returns
  * `gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]`, where
  * `path` is the #GtkTreePath of the active item.
  *
  * Return value: An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
- *     or -1 if there's no active item.
+ *     or -1 if there’s no active item.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -5067,7 +5067,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode. See
  * gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs().
  *
- * Returns: the menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
+ * Returns: the menu’s title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
  * string which must not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -5100,7 +5100,7 @@ G_GNUC_END_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS;
  * @combo_box: a #GtkComboBox
  * @title: a title for the menu in tearoff mode
  *
- * Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+ * Sets the menu’s title in tearoff mode.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -5134,7 +5134,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_title (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * @combo_box: a #GtkComboBox
  * @fixed: whether to use a fixed popup width
  *
- * Specifies whether the popup's width should be a fixed width
+ * Specifies whether the popup’s width should be a fixed width
  * matching the allocated width of the combo box.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -5177,13 +5177,13 @@ gtk_combo_box_get_popup_fixed_width (GtkComboBox *combo_box)
  * gtk_combo_box_get_popup_accessible:
  * @combo_box: a #GtkComboBox
  *
- * Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
+ * Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box’s popup.
  *
  * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
  * applications should have little use for it.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): the accessible object corresponding
- *     to the combo box's popup.
+ *     to the combo box’s popup.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcombobox.h b/gtk/gtkcombobox.h
index a427712..0cded83 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcombobox.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcombobox.h
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ struct _GtkComboBox
  * @parent_class: The parent class.
  * @changed: Signal is emitted when the active item is changed.
  * @format_entry_text: Signal which allows you to change how the text
- *    displayed in a combo box's entry is displayed.
+ *    displayed in a combo box’s entry is displayed.
  */
 struct _GtkComboBoxClass
 {
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcontainer.c b/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
index 202668c..db6e26f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
@@ -86,8 +86,8 @@
  * width-for-height).
  *
  * There are some things to keep in mind when implementing container widgets
- * that make use of GTK+'s height for width geometry management system. First,
- * it's important to note that a container must prioritize one of its
+ * that make use of GTK+’s height for width geometry management system. First,
+ * it’s important to note that a container must prioritize one of its
  * dimensions, that is to say that a widget or container can only have a
  * #GtkSizeRequestMode that is %GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH or
  * %GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_WIDTH_FOR_HEIGHT. However, every widget and container
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@
  * The container will then move on to request the preferred height for each child by using
  * gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_for_width() and using the sizes stored in the #GtkRequestedSize array.
  *
- * To allocate a height-for-width container, it's again important
+ * To allocate a height-for-width container, it’s again important
  * to consider that a container must prioritize one dimension over the other. So if
  * a container is a height-for-width container it must first allocate all widgets horizontally
  * using a #GtkRequestedSize array and gtk_distribute_natural_allocation() and then add any
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@
  * that the container adds. Then vertical expand space should be added where appropriate and available
  * and the container should go on to actually allocating the child widgets.
  *
- * See [GtkWidget's geometry management section][geometry-management]
+ * See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management]
  * to learn more about implementing height-for-width geometry management for widgets.
  *
  * # Child properties
@@ -1554,9 +1554,9 @@ gtk_container_add (GtkContainer *container,
  * Note that @container will own a reference to @widget, and that this
  * may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
  * container can destroy that widget. If you want to use @widget
- * again, you need to add a reference to it while it's not inside
+ * again, you need to add a reference to it while it’s not inside
  * a container, using g_object_ref(). If you don't want to use @widget
- * again it's usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
+ * again it’s usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
  * using gtk_widget_destroy() since this will remove it from the
  * container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
  **/
@@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ _gtk_container_dequeue_resize_handler (GtkContainer *container)
  * Sets the resize mode for the container.
  *
  * The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
- * will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+ * will be passed to the container’s parent, queued for later execution
  * or executed immediately.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.12: Resize modes are deprecated. They aren't necessary
@@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ gtk_container_get_resize_mode (GtkContainer *container)
 /**
  * gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws:
  * @container: a #GtkContainer
- * @needs_redraws: the new value for the container's @reallocate_redraws flag
+ * @needs_redraws: the new value for the container’s @reallocate_redraws flag
  *
  * Sets the @reallocate_redraws flag of the container to the given value.
  *
@@ -2212,10 +2212,10 @@ gtk_container_get_focus_child (GtkContainer *container)
  * gtk_container_get_children:
  * @container: a #GtkContainer
  *
- * Returns the container's non-internal children. See
+ * Returns the container’s non-internal children. See
  * gtk_container_forall() for details on what constitutes an "internal" child.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated list of the container's 
non-internal children.
+ * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated list of the container’s 
non-internal children.
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_container_get_children (GtkContainer *container)
@@ -3041,7 +3041,7 @@ chain_widget_destroyed (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
  *
  * In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
- * container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
+ * container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it’s allowed
  * to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
  * in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
  * when the focus chain is actually traversed.
@@ -3455,7 +3455,7 @@ gtk_container_should_propagate_draw (GtkContainer   *container,
  * @container: a #GtkContainer
  * @child: a child of @container
  * @cr: Cairo context as passed to the container. If you want to use @cr
- *   in container's draw function, consider using cairo_save() and
+ *   in container’s draw function, consider using cairo_save() and
  *   cairo_restore() before calling this function.
  *
  * When a container receives a call to the draw function, it must send
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcontainer.h b/gtk/gtkcontainer.h
index 29d510f..00c3936 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcontainer.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcontainer.h
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ struct _GtkContainer
  * @forall: Invokes callback on each child of container.
  * @set_focus_child: Sets the focused child of container.
  * @child_type: Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
- * @composite_name: Gets a widget's composite name. Deprecated: 3.10.
+ * @composite_name: Gets a widget’s composite name. Deprecated: 3.10.
  * @set_child_property: Set a property on a child of container.
  * @get_child_property: Get a property from a child of container.
  * @get_path_for_child: Get path representing entire widget hierarchy
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcssprovider.c b/gtk/gtkcssprovider.c
index 04cfab3..2792acf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcssprovider.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcssprovider.c
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
  *     background-color: #898989
  * }
  *
- * /&ast; Theme notebooks, and anything that's within these &ast;/
+ * /&ast; Theme notebooks, and anything that’s within these &ast;/
  * GtkNotebook {
  *     background-color: #a939f0
  * }
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@
  *
  * # &commat; Rules
  *
- * GTK+'s CSS supports the &commat;import rule, in order to load another
+ * GTK+’s CSS supports the &commat;import rule, in order to load another
  * CSS style sheet in addition to the currently parsed one.
  *
  * An example for using the &commat;import rule:
@@ -404,7 +404,7 @@
  *       </row>
  *       <row>
  *         <entry>alpha(@color, @f)</entry>
- *         <entry>Modifies passed color's alpha by a factor @f. @f is a
+ *         <entry>Modifies passed color’s alpha by a factor @f. @f is a
  *                floating point number. @f < 1.0 results in a more transparent
  *                color while @f > 1.0 results in a more opaque color.
  *         </entry>
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcsssection.h b/gtk/gtkcsssection.h
index 7966982..4f88eee 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcsssection.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcsssection.h
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ G_BEGIN_DECLS
  *   Animations](http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-animations/#keyframes) for details. Since 3.6
  *
  * The different types of sections indicate parts of a CSS document as
- * parsed by GTK's CSS parser. They are oriented towards the
+ * parsed by GTK’s CSS parser. They are oriented towards the
  * [CSS Grammar](http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/grammar.html),
  * but may contain extensions.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcssstyleproperty.c b/gtk/gtkcssstyleproperty.c
index 33d6bda..5468d20 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcssstyleproperty.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcssstyleproperty.c
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ _gtk_css_style_property_get_n_properties (void)
  * @id: the id of the property
  *
  * Gets the style property with the given id. All style properties (but not
- * shorthand properties) are indexable by id so that it's easy to use arrays
+ * shorthand properties) are indexable by id so that it’s easy to use arrays
  * when doing style lookups.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): The style property with the given id
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdialog.c b/gtk/gtkdialog.c
index cf09b25..e5b2c03 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdialog.c
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
  *
  * Dialog boxes are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount
  * of input, e.g. to display a message, ask a question, or anything else
- * that does not require extensive effort on the user's part.
+ * that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.
  *
  * GTK+ treats a dialog as a window split vertically. The top section is a
  * #GtkVBox, and is where widgets such as a #GtkLabel or a #GtkEntry should
@@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ gtk_dialog_new_empty (const gchar     *title,
  * #GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT flag. Buttons are from left to right,
  * so the first button in the list will be the leftmost button in the dialog.
  *
- * Here's a simple example:
+ * Here’s a simple example:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  *  GtkWidget *dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("My dialog",
  *                                                   main_app_window,
@@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ get_response_data (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
  * connecting a signal handler that will emit the #GtkDialog::response
  * signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is
- * appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a
+ * appended to the end of the dialog’s action area. If you want to add a
  * non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the @action_area field
  * of the #GtkDialog struct.
  **/
@@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ gtk_dialog_add_action_widget (GtkDialog *dialog,
  * Adds a button with the given text and sets things up so that
  * clicking the button will emit the #GtkDialog::response signal with
  * the given @response_id. The button is appended to the end of the
- * dialog's action area. The button widget is returned, but usually
+ * dialog’s action area. The button widget is returned, but usually
  * you don't need it.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkButton widget that was added
@@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ gtk_dialog_add_buttons (GtkDialog   *dialog,
  * @setting: %TRUE for sensitive
  *
  * Calls `gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, @setting)`
- * for each widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id.
+ * for each widget in the dialog’s action area with the given @response_id.
  * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
  **/
 void
@@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ gtk_dialog_set_response_sensitive (GtkDialog *dialog,
  * @dialog: a #GtkDialog
  * @response_id: a response ID
  *
- * Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id
+ * Sets the last widget in the dialog’s action area with the given @response_id
  * as the default widget for the dialog. Pressing “Enter” normally activates
  * the default widget.
  **/
@@ -1449,8 +1449,8 @@ gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_valist (GtkDialog *dialog,
 /**
  * gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order:
  * @dialog: a #GtkDialog
- * @first_response_id: a response id used by one @dialog's buttons
- * @...: a list of more response ids of @dialog's buttons, terminated by -1
+ * @first_response_id: a response id used by one @dialog’s buttons
+ * @...: a list of more response ids of @dialog’s buttons, terminated by -1
  *
  * Sets an alternative button order. If the
  * #GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
@@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order (GtkDialog *dialog,
  * @dialog: a #GtkDialog
  * @n_params: the number of response ids in @new_order
  * @new_order: (array length=n_params): an array of response ids of
- *     @dialog's buttons
+ *     @dialog’s buttons
  *
  * Sets an alternative button order. If the
  * #GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdnd-quartz.c b/gtk/gtkdnd-quartz.c
index 8420612..e1680f4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdnd-quartz.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdnd-quartz.c
@@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  * @target_list: (allow-none): list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
  */
 void
@@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list (GtkWidget      *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  */
 void
 gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_image_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  */
 void
 gtk_drag_dest_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_uri_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  */
 void
 gtk_drag_dest_add_uri_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_drop (GtkWidget            *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_set_track_motion: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  * @track_motion: whether to accept all targets
  */
 void
@@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_track_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_get_track_motion: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_drag_dest_get_track_motion (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_get_target_list (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_set_target_list: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag source
  * @target_list: (allow-none): list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
  */
 void
@@ -1554,7 +1554,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_set_target_list (GtkWidget     *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets:
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  *
  * Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
  * the target list of the drag source.  The targets
@@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  */
 void
 gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  */
 void
 gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdnd.c b/gtk/gtkdnd.c
index 1c864ff..f290aa6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdnd.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdnd.c
@@ -1357,10 +1357,10 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_internal (GtkWidget       *widget,
  * Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
  *
  * The default behaviors listed in @flags have an effect similar
- * to installing default handlers for the widget's drag-and-drop signals
+ * to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
  * (#GtkWidget::drag-motion, #GtkWidget::drag-drop, ...). They all exist
  * for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
- * sufficient to connect to the widget's #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
+ * sufficient to connect to the widget’s #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
  * signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
  *
  * Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
@@ -1372,8 +1372,8 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_internal (GtkWidget       *widget,
  * Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget::drag-motion
  * handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
  *
- * There's no way to set a default action here, you can use the
- * #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here's an example which selects
+ * There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
+ * #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
  * the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  * static void
@@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  * @target_list: (allow-none): list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
  * 
  * Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
@@ -1549,7 +1549,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list (GtkWidget      *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  *
  * Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
@@ -1576,7 +1576,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_image_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  *
  * Add the image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
@@ -1603,7 +1603,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_add_uri_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  *
  * Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
@@ -1630,7 +1630,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_add_uri_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_set_track_motion: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  * @track_motion: whether to accept all targets
  *
  * Tells the widget to emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion and
@@ -1659,7 +1659,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_track_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_dest_get_track_motion: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag destination
  *
  * Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
  * emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
@@ -2857,7 +2857,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_get_target_list (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_set_target_list: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s a drag source
  * @target_list: (allow-none): list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
  *
  * Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
@@ -2893,7 +2893,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_set_target_list (GtkWidget     *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  *
  * Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag source.  The targets
@@ -2920,7 +2920,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  *
  * Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag source. The targets
@@ -2947,7 +2947,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets: (method)
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s is a drag source
  *
  * Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
  * the target list of the drag source.  The targets
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdnd.h b/gtk/gtkdnd.h
index 83fda61..c7060da 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdnd.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkdnd.h
@@ -40,14 +40,14 @@ G_BEGIN_DECLS
 /**
  * GtkDestDefaults:
  * @GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION: If set for a widget, GTK+, during a drag over this
- *   widget will check if the drag matches this widget's list of possible targets
+ *   widget will check if the drag matches this widget’s list of possible targets
  *   and actions.
  *   GTK+ will then call gdk_drag_status() as appropriate.
  * @GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT: If set for a widget, GTK+ will draw a highlight on
  *   this widget as long as a drag is over this widget and the widget drag format
  *   and action are acceptable.
  * @GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP: If set for a widget, when a drop occurs, GTK+ will
- *   will check if the drag matches this widget's list of possible targets and
+ *   will check if the drag matches this widget’s list of possible targets and
  *   actions. If so, GTK+ will call gtk_drag_get_data() on behalf of the widget.
  *   Whether or not the drop is successful, GTK+ will call gtk_drag_finish(). If
  *   the action was a move, then if the drag was successful, then %TRUE will be
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdrawingarea.c b/gtk/gtkdrawingarea.c
index ca5f34e..f2775ea 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdrawingarea.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdrawingarea.c
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
  * @See_also: #GtkImage
  *
  * The #GtkDrawingArea widget is used for creating custom user interface
- * elements. It's essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After
+ * elements. It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After
  * creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:
  *
  * - Mouse and button press signals to respond to input from
@@ -93,9 +93,9 @@
  * ]|
  *
  * Draw signals are normally delivered when a drawing area first comes
- * onscreen, or when it's covered by another window and then uncovered.
+ * onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered.
  * You can also force an expose event by adding to the “damage region”
- * of the drawing area's window; gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() and
+ * of the drawing area’s window; gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() and
  * gdk_window_invalidate_rect() are equally good ways to do this.
  * You'll then get a draw signal for the invalid region.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentry.c b/gtk/gtkentry.c
index b10db21..7715e05 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentry.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentry.c
@@ -7422,7 +7422,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_buffer (GtkEntry       *entry,
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  * @text_area: (out): Return location for the text area.
  *
- * Gets the area where the entry's text is drawn. This function is
+ * Gets the area where the entry’s text is drawn. This function is
  * useful when drawing something to the entry in a draw callback.
  *
  * If the entry is not realized, @text_area is filled with zeros.
@@ -7800,7 +7800,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_text_length (GtkEntry *entry)
 /**
  * gtk_entry_set_activates_default:
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
- * @setting: %TRUE to activate window's default widget on Enter keypress
+ * @setting: %TRUE to activate window’s default widget on Enter keypress
  *
  * If @setting is %TRUE, pressing Enter in the @entry will activate the default
  * widget for the window containing the entry. This usually means that
@@ -7939,8 +7939,8 @@ gtk_entry_get_has_frame (GtkEntry *entry)
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  * @border: (allow-none): a #GtkBorder, or %NULL
  *
- * Sets %entry's inner-border property to @border, or clears it if %NULL
- * is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry's text, but
+ * Sets %entry’s inner-border property to @border, or clears it if %NULL
+ * is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry’s text, but
  * inside its frame.
  *
  * If set, this property overrides the inner-border style property.
@@ -7967,10 +7967,10 @@ gtk_entry_set_inner_border (GtkEntry        *entry,
  * gtk_entry_get_inner_border:
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  *
- * This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
+ * This function returns the entry’s #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
  * gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the entry’s #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -8023,7 +8023,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_layout (GtkEntry *entry)
  * 
  * Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
  * by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
- * entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+ * entry’s #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
  * with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
  * 
  * Return value: byte index into the entry contents
@@ -8061,7 +8061,7 @@ gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index (GtkEntry *entry,
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  * @text_index: byte index into the entry contents
  * 
- * Converts from a position in the entry's #PangoLayout (returned by
+ * Converts from a position in the entry’s #PangoLayout (returned by
  * gtk_entry_get_layout()) to a position in the entry contents
  * (returned by gtk_entry_get_text()).
  * 
@@ -8782,7 +8782,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_icon_storage_type (GtkEntry             *entry,
  * @y: the y coordinate of the position to find
  *
  * Finds the icon at the given position and return its index. The
- * position's coordinates are relative to the @entry's top left corner.
+ * position’s coordinates are relative to the @entry’s top left corner.
  * If @x, @y doesn't lie inside an icon, -1 is returned.
  * This function is intended for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
  * signal handler.
@@ -8910,9 +8910,9 @@ gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source (GtkEntry *entry)
  * gtk_entry_get_icon_area:
  * @entry: A #GtkEntry
  * @icon_pos: Icon position
- * @icon_area: (out): Return location for the icon's area
+ * @icon_area: (out): Return location for the icon’s area
  *
- * Gets the area where entry's icon at @icon_pos is drawn.
+ * Gets the area where entry’s icon at @icon_pos is drawn.
  * This function is useful when drawing something to the
  * entry in a draw callback.
  *
@@ -10189,9 +10189,9 @@ gtk_entry_get_cursor_hadjustment (GtkEntry *entry)
 /**
  * gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction:
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
- * @fraction: fraction of the task that's been completed
+ * @fraction: fraction of the task that’s been completed
  *
- * Causes the entry's progress indicator to “fill in” the given
+ * Causes the entry’s progress indicator to “fill in” the given
  * fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
  * inclusive.
  *
@@ -10242,7 +10242,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction (GtkEntry *entry,
  * gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction:
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  *
- * Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+ * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
  * See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
  *
  * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
@@ -10312,7 +10312,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step (GtkEntry *entry)
  * @entry: a #GtkEntry
  *
  * Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
- * Causes the entry's progress indicator to enter “activity mode,”
+ * Causes the entry’s progress indicator to enter “activity mode,”
  * where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to
  * gtk_entry_progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit
  * (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c b/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
index 067048f..cf72518 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
  * #GtkEntryBuffer may be derived from. Such a derived class might allow
  * text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory,
  * useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could 
- * integrate with an application's concept of undo/redo.
+ * integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c b/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
index 869b64e..a386ada 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
@@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_insert_action (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * @index_: the index of the item to insert
  * @text: text of the item to insert
  *
- * Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+ * Inserts an action in @completion’s action item list at position @index_
  * with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
  * gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
  *
@@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * @index_: the index of the item to insert
  * @markup: markup of the item to insert
  *
- * Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+ * Inserts an action in @completion’s action item list at position @index_
  * with markup @markup.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1447,7 +1447,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * @completion: a #GtkEntryCompletion
  * @index_: the index of the item to delete
  *
- * Deletes the action at @index_ from @completion's action list.
+ * Deletes the action at @index_ from @completion’s action list.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_real_insert_prefix (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * @completion: a #GtkEntryCompletion
  *
  * Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
- * the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+ * the completion or %NULL if there’s no completion ongoing.
  *
  * Returns: the prefix for the current completion
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkenums.h b/gtk/gtkenums.h
index 0b88f71..34efa1f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkenums.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkenums.h
@@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ typedef enum
  * @GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE: Zero or one element may be selected.
  * @GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE: Exactly one element is selected.
  *     In some circumstances, such as initially or during a search
- *     operation, it's possible for no element to be selected with
+ *     operation, it’s possible for no element to be selected with
  *     %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE. What is really enforced is that the user
  *     can't deselect a currently selected element except by selecting
  *     another element.
@@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ typedef enum
  *  other, rather than vertically stacked
  *
  * Used to customize the appearance of a #GtkToolbar. Note that
- * setting the toolbar style overrides the user's preferences
+ * setting the toolbar style overrides the user’s preferences
  * for the default toolbar style.  Note that if the button has only
  * a label set and GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS is used, the label will be
  * visible, and vice versa.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkexpander.c b/gtk/gtkexpander.c
index 270068f..a9bc69a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkexpander.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkexpander.c
@@ -1903,10 +1903,10 @@ gtk_expander_get_use_underline (GtkExpander *expander)
 /**
  * gtk_expander_set_use_markup:
  * @expander: a #GtkExpander
- * @use_markup: %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup
+ * @use_markup: %TRUE if the label’s text should be parsed for markup
  *
  * Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in
- * [Pango's text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
+ * [Pango’s text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_label_set_markup().
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1938,11 +1938,11 @@ gtk_expander_set_use_markup (GtkExpander *expander,
  * gtk_expander_get_use_markup:
  * @expander: a #GtkExpander
  *
- * Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+ * Returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as marked up with
  * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_expander_set_use_markup().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+ * Return value: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
index 90bc88a..091ef50 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
@@ -704,10 +704,10 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * @filename: (type filename): the filename to set as current
  * 
  * Sets @filename as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
- * the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
+ * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
  * files will be unselected.  If the @chooser is in
- * %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name will also appear in
- * the dialog's file name entry.
+ * %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
+ * the dialog’s file name entry.
  *
  * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
  * for the directory change.
@@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * ]|
  *
  * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
- * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file's existing location
+ * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
  * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
  * 
  * Return value: Not useful.
@@ -996,10 +996,10 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name  (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
  * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
  *
- * Returns: The raw text from the file chooser's “Name” entry.  Free this with
+ * Returns: The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with
  * g_free().  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is
  * whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in
- * UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system's encoding for filenames.
+ * UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  **/
@@ -1057,9 +1057,9 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * @uri: the URI to set as current
  * 
  * Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
- * by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
- * list.  If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
- * name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+ * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
+ * list.  If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI’s base
+ * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
  *
  * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the 
  * directory change.
@@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  *
  *
  * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
- * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file's existing location
+ * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
  * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
  * 
  * Return value: Not useful.
@@ -1418,9 +1418,9 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_files (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * @error: (allow-none): location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
  *
  * Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
- * to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
- * the @chooser is in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
- * will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+ * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
+ * the @chooser is in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file’s base name
+ * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
  *
  * If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
  * folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
@@ -2012,7 +2012,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * @folder: (type filename): filename of the folder to remove
  * @error: (allow-none): location to store error, or %NULL
  * 
- * Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+ * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
  * In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
@@ -2110,7 +2110,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * @uri: URI of the folder to remove
  * @error: (allow-none): location to store error, or %NULL
  * 
- * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+ * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
  * In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.h b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.h
index 6dff84e..d1f5543 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.h
@@ -64,14 +64,14 @@ typedef enum
  * @GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_CONFIRM: The file chooser will present
  *  its stock dialog to confirm about overwriting an existing file.
  * @GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_ACCEPT_FILENAME: The file chooser will
- *  terminate and accept the user's choice of a file name.
+ *  terminate and accept the user’s choice of a file name.
  * @GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_SELECT_AGAIN: The file chooser will
  *  continue running, so as to let the user select another file name.
  *
  * Used as a return value of handlers for the
  * #GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal of a #GtkFileChooser. This
  * value determines whether the file chooser will present the stock
- * confirmation dialog, accept the user's choice of a filename, or
+ * confirmation dialog, accept the user’s choice of a filename, or
  * let the user choose another filename.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
index 43d8c84..b8c2313 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
@@ -2774,7 +2774,7 @@ combo_box_changed_cb (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
 
 /* Calback for the "notify::popup-shown" signal on the combo box.
  * When the combo is popped up, we don't want the ROW_TYPE_EMPTY_SELECTION to be visible
- * at all; otherwise we would be showing a “(None)” item in the combo box's popup.
+ * at all; otherwise we would be showing a “(None)” item in the combo box’s popup.
  *
  * However, when the combo box is *not* popped up, we want the empty-selection row
  * to be visible depending on the selection.
@@ -3007,7 +3007,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title (GtkFileChooserButton *button,
  * Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
  * should not be modified or freed.
  *
- * Returns: a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+ * Returns: a pointer to the browse dialog’s title.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -3023,7 +3023,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title (GtkFileChooserButton *button)
  * gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars:
  * @button: the button widget to examine.
  *
- * Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+ * Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget’s entry and/or label.
  *
  * Returns: an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
index 8731f41..771f38e 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
  *
  * - To choose a folder instead of a file. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.
  *
- * Note that old versions of the file chooser's documentation suggested
+ * Note that old versions of the file chooser’s documentation suggested
  * using gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder() in various
  * situations, with the intention of letting the application
  * suggest a reasonable default folder.  This is no longer
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
index ec5cb3a..bef5003 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
@@ -2463,8 +2463,8 @@ put_recent_folder_in_pathbar (GtkFileChooserWidget *impl, GtkTreeIter *iter)
 }
 
 /* Sets the pathbar in the appropriate mode according to the current operation mode and action.  This is the 
central function for
- * dealing with the pathbar's widgets; as long as impl->action and impl->operation_mode are set correctly, 
then calling this
- * function will update all the pathbar's widgets.
+ * dealing with the pathbar’s widgets; as long as impl->action and impl->operation_mode are set correctly, 
then calling this
+ * function will update all the pathbar’s widgets.
  */
 static void
 path_bar_update (GtkFileChooserWidget *impl)
@@ -3265,7 +3265,7 @@ switch_to_cwd (GtkFileChooserWidget *impl)
 }
 
 /* Sets the file chooser to showing Recent Files or $CWD, depending on the
- * user's settings.
+ * user’s settings.
  */
 static void
 set_startup_mode (GtkFileChooserWidget *impl)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c b/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
index c103619..ff60a98 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
  * For this, the model keeps a model->n_nodes_valid field which is the count of valid nodes starting from the
  * beginning of the model->files array.  When a node changes its information, or when a node gets deleted, 
that
  * node and the following ones get invalidated by simply setting model->n_nodes_valid to the array index of 
the
- * node.  If the model happens to need a node's row number and that node is in the model->files array after
+ * node.  If the model happens to need a node’s row number and that node is in the model->files array after
  * model->n_nodes_valid, then the nodes get re-validated up to the sought node.  See node_validate_rows() for
  * this logic.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkflowbox.c b/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
index 22ad2cf..e13df85 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
@@ -4278,7 +4278,7 @@ gtk_flow_box_get_column_spacing (GtkFlowBox *box)
  * @n_children: the minimum number of children per line
  *
  * Sets the minimum number of children to line up
- * in @box's orientation before flowing.
+ * in @box’s orientation before flowing.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -4321,7 +4321,7 @@ gtk_flow_box_get_min_children_per_line (GtkFlowBox *box)
  * @n_children: the maximum number of children per line
  *
  * Sets the maximum number of children to request and
- * allocate space for in @box's orientation.
+ * allocate space for in @box’s orientation.
  *
  * Setting the maximum number of children per line
  * limits the overall natural size request to be no more
diff --git a/gtk/gtkframe.c b/gtk/gtkframe.c
index ec0f926..4a2ac00 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkframe.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkframe.c
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ gtk_frame_set_label (GtkFrame *frame,
  * gtk_frame_get_label:
  * @frame: a #GtkFrame
  * 
- * If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
+ * If the frame’s label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
  * text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
  * for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
  * to gtk_frame_new().)
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ gtk_frame_get_label_widget (GtkFrame *frame)
  *   0.0 or 1.0 the gap in the frame won't be painted because the label
  *   will be completely above or below the frame.
  * 
- * Sets the alignment of the frame widget's label. The
+ * Sets the alignment of the frame widget’s label. The
  * default values for a newly created frame are 0.0 and 0.5.
  **/
 void
@@ -561,11 +561,11 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_align (GtkFrame *frame,
  * gtk_frame_get_label_align:
  * @frame: a #GtkFrame
  * @xalign: (out) (allow-none): location to store X alignment of
- *     frame's label, or %NULL
+ *     frame’s label, or %NULL
  * @yalign: (out) (allow-none): location to store X alignment of
- *     frame's label, or %NULL
+ *     frame’s label, or %NULL
  * 
- * Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame's label. See
+ * Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame’s label. See
  * gtk_frame_set_label_align().
  **/
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtkgladecatalog.c b/gtk/gtkgladecatalog.c
index c179ea2..f9fb7df 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkgladecatalog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkgladecatalog.c
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 
 /* This function is referred to in gtk/glade/gtk-private-widgets.xml
  * and is used to ensure the private types for use in Glade while
- * editing UI files that define GTK+'s various composite widget classes.
+ * editing UI files that define GTK+’s various composite widget classes.
  */
 _GDK_EXTERN void
 gtk_glade_catalog_init (const gchar *catalog_name)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkgrid.c b/gtk/gtkgrid.c
index 15754e7..14e7dd6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkgrid.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkgrid.c
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
  *
  * GtkGrid is a container which arranges its child widgets in
  * rows and columns. It is a very similar to #GtkTable and #GtkBox,
- * but it consistently uses #GtkWidget's #GtkWidget:margin and #GtkWidget:expand
+ * but it consistently uses #GtkWidget’s #GtkWidget:margin and #GtkWidget:expand
  * properties instead of custom child properties, and it fully supports
  * [height-for-width geometry management][geometry-management].
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkicontheme.c b/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
index 08d3aba..2cd943f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@
  * or stock items, rather than directly, but looking up icons
  * directly is also simple. The #GtkIconTheme object acts
  * as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You
- * can create new #GtkIconTheme objects, but it's much more
+ * can create new #GtkIconTheme objects, but it’s much more
  * efficient to use the standard icon theme for the #GdkScreen
  * so that the icon information is shared with other people
  * looking up icons. In the case where the default screen is
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_class_init (GtkIconThemeClass *klass)
 
 
 /* Callback when the display that the icon theme is attached to
- * is closed; unset the screen, and if it's the unique theme
+ * is closed; unset the screen, and if it’s the unique theme
  * for the screen, drop the reference
  */
 static void
@@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ unset_screen (GtkIconTheme *icon_theme)
  * @screen: a #GdkScreen
  * 
  * Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
- * to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
+ * to track the user’s currently configured icon theme,
  * which might be different for different screens.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_finalize (GObject *object)
  * one or more of the directories in @path with the same name
  * as the icon theme. (Themes from multiple of the path elements
  * are combined to allow themes to be extended by adding icons
- * in the user's home directory.)
+ * in the user’s home directory.)
  *
  * In addition if an icon found isn't found either in the current
  * icon theme or the default icon theme, and an image file with
@@ -5043,7 +5043,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_display_name (GtkIconInfo *icon_info)
  * of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
  * that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
  * be present in the file system. For instance, the default
- * images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
+ * images for all of GTK+’s stock icons are registered
  * as built-icons.
  *
  * In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
diff --git a/gtk/gtkiconview.c b/gtk/gtkiconview.c
index f4184f3..ce40e68 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkiconview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkiconview.c
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
  * Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as
  * opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious),
  * #GtkIconView will only display the first level of the tree and
- * ignore the tree's branches.
+ * ignore the tree’s branches.
  */
 
 #define SCROLL_EDGE_SIZE 15
@@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ adjust_wrap_width (GtkIconView *icon_view)
  * * padded size
  *   This is the cell size plus the item padding on each side.
  * * spaced size
- *   This is the padded size plus the spacing. This is what's used for most
+ *   This is the padded size plus the spacing. This is what’s used for most
  *   calculations because it can (ab)use the following formula:
  *   iconview_size = 2 * margin + n_items * spaced_size - spacing
  * So when reading this code and fixing my bugs where I confuse these two, be
@@ -2182,7 +2182,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_remove_editable (GtkCellArea            *area,
  * @start_editing: %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
  *
  * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it.  This is
- * useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular item.
+ * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular item.
  * If @cell is not %NULL, then focus is given to the cell specified by 
  * it. Additionally, if @start_editing is %TRUE, then editing should be 
  * started in the specified cell.  
@@ -4668,7 +4668,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell (GtkIconView     *icon_view,
  * tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
  * @model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
  * that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
- * to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+ * to be relative to @icon_view’s bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
  *
  * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
  *
@@ -4761,11 +4761,11 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_query_cb (GtkWidget  *widget,
 /**
  * gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column:
  * @icon_view: a #GtkIconView
- * @column: an integer, which is a valid column number for @icon_view's model
+ * @column: an integer, which is a valid column number for @icon_view’s model
  *
  * If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you
  * can use this function to have #GtkIconView handle these automatically
- * for you. @column should be set to the column in @icon_view's model
+ * for you. @column should be set to the column in @icon_view’s model
  * containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
  *
  * When enabled, #GtkWidget:has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
@@ -4810,8 +4810,8 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_column:
  * @icon_view: a #GtkIconView
  *
- * Returns the column of @icon_view's model which is being used for
- * displaying tooltips on @icon_view's rows.
+ * Returns the column of @icon_view’s model which is being used for
+ * displaying tooltips on @icon_view’s rows.
  *
  * Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
  * used, or -1 if this is disabled.
@@ -5254,7 +5254,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_text_column (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  *
  * Returns the column with text for @icon_view.
  *
- * Returns: the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
+ * Returns: the text column, or -1 if it’s unset.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5317,7 +5317,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  *
  * Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
  *
- * Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+ * Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it’s unset.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5379,7 +5379,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_pixbuf_column (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  *
  * Returns the column with pixbufs for @icon_view.
  *
- * Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
+ * Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it’s unset.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -6013,7 +6013,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_margin (GtkIconView *icon_view)
  * @item_padding: the item padding
  *
  * Sets the #GtkIconView:item-padding property which specifies the padding
- * around each of the icon view's items.
+ * around each of the icon view’s items.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkimage.c b/gtk/gtkimage.c
index 686677b..abe536d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkimage.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkimage.c
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
  * The #GtkImage widget displays an image. Various kinds of object
  * can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a
  * #GdkPixbuf ("pixel buffer") from a file, and then display that.
- * There's a convenience function to do this, gtk_image_new_from_file(),
+ * There’s a convenience function to do this, gtk_image_new_from_file(),
  * used as follows:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  *   GtkWidget *image;
@@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_stock (const gchar    *stock_id,
  *
  * Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
  * #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR. Instead of using
- * this function, usually it's better to create a #GtkIconFactory, put
+ * this function, usually it’s better to create a #GtkIconFactory, put
  * your icon sets in the icon factory, add the icon factory to the
  * list of default factories with gtk_icon_factory_add_default(), and
  * then use gtk_image_new_from_stock(). This will allow themes to
diff --git a/gtk/gtkimcontext.c b/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
index e2c3257..09355c9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ G_DEFINE_ABSTRACT_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (GtkIMContext, gtk_im_context, G_TYPE_OBJECT
  *   other means if turned off.
  * @set_surrounding: Called via gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() in response
  *   to signal #GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding to update the input
- *   method's idea of the context around the cursor. It is not necessary to
+ *   method’s idea of the context around the cursor. It is not necessary to
  *   override this method even with input methods which implement
  *   context-dependent behavior. The base implementation is sufficient for
  *   gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to work.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkinfobar.c b/gtk/gtkinfobar.c
index 902b542..3beffdc 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkinfobar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkinfobar.c
@@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ gtk_info_bar_new_with_buttons (const gchar *first_button_text,
  * @setting: TRUE for sensitive
  *
  * Calls gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, setting) for each
- * widget in the info bars's action area with the given response_id.
+ * widget in the info bars’s action area with the given response_id.
  * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
@@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ gtk_info_bar_set_response_sensitive (GtkInfoBar *info_bar,
  * @info_bar: a #GtkInfoBar
  * @response_id: a response ID
  *
- * Sets the last widget in the info bar's action area with
+ * Sets the last widget in the info bar’s action area with
  * the given response_id as the default widget for the dialog.
  * Pressing “Enter” normally activates the default widget.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c b/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
index 64d98aa..a46d72f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ _gtk_key_hash_lookup (GtkKeyHash      *key_hash,
  * @event: a #GtkEvent
  * 
  * Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
- * given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
+ * given keyval/modifiers pair. It’s better to use
  * _gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
  * available.  The results are sorted so that entries with less
  * modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
diff --git a/gtk/gtklabel.c b/gtk/gtklabel.c
index 7cb976a..64ff248 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklabel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklabel.c
@@ -101,8 +101,8 @@
  *
  * Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is
  * inside, such as a #GtkButton; if the label is not inside the
- * mnemonic's target widget, you have to tell the label about the target
- * using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget(). Here's a simple example where
+ * mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target
+ * using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget(). Here’s a simple example where
  * the label is inside a button:
  *
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@
  *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (button), label);
  * ]|
  *
- * There's a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label
+ * There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label
  * already inside:
  *
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@
  * fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple
  * [markup format][PangoMarkupFormat].
  *
- * Here's how to create a label with a small font:
+ * Here’s how to create a label with a small font:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  *   label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
  *   gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");
@@ -1948,7 +1948,7 @@ gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GtkLabel  *label,
  * Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
  * label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the target of the label's mnemonic,
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the target of the label’s mnemonic,
  *     or %NULL if none has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
@@ -2596,7 +2596,7 @@ gtk_label_set_markup_internal (GtkLabel    *label,
  *
  * Parses @str which is marked up with the
  * [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat], setting the
- * label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
+ * label’s text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
  * external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or
  * g_markup_printf_escaped()<!-- -->:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
@@ -2632,7 +2632,7 @@ gtk_label_set_markup (GtkLabel    *label,
  *
  * Parses @str which is marked up with the
  * [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat],
- * setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results.
+ * setting the label’s text and attribute list based on the parse results.
  * If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
  * indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
  *
@@ -2984,14 +2984,14 @@ gtk_label_get_max_width_chars (GtkLabel *label)
  * @wrap: the setting
  *
  * Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
- * lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+ * lines if text exceeds the widget’s size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
  * by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
  *
  * Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
- * wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+ * wrap at its parent container’s width, because GTK+ widgets
  * conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
- * container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
- * set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
+ * container’s size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+ * set the label’s width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
  **/
 void
 gtk_label_set_line_wrap (GtkLabel *label,
@@ -3133,8 +3133,8 @@ gtk_label_clear_layout (GtkLabel *label)
  * @width: the width to measure with in pango units, or -1 for infinite
  *
  * Gets a layout that can be used for measuring sizes. The returned
- * layout will be identical to the label's layout except for the
- * layout's width, which will be set to @width. Do not modify the returned
+ * layout will be identical to the label’s layout except for the
+ * layout’s width, which will be set to @width. Do not modify the returned
  * layout.
  *
  * Returns: a new reference to a pango layout
@@ -4300,7 +4300,7 @@ gtk_label_set_uline_text_internal (GtkLabel    *label,
  * @label: a #GtkLabel
  * @str: a string
  * 
- * Sets the label's text from the string @str.
+ * Sets the label’s text from the string @str.
  * If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
  * indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
  * The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen 
@@ -5449,7 +5449,7 @@ gtk_label_select_region  (GtkLabel *label,
  * @end: (out): return location for end of selection, as a character offset
  * 
  * Gets the selected range of characters in the label, returning %TRUE
- * if there's a selection.
+ * if there’s a selection.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if selection is non-empty
  **/
@@ -5571,10 +5571,10 @@ gtk_label_get_layout_offsets (GtkLabel *label,
 /**
  * gtk_label_set_use_markup:
  * @label: a #GtkLabel
- * @setting: %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup.
+ * @setting: %TRUE if the label’s text should be parsed for markup.
  *
  * Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in
- * [Pango's text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
+ * [Pango’s text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_label_set_markup().
  **/
 void
@@ -5595,11 +5595,11 @@ gtk_label_set_use_markup (GtkLabel *label,
  * gtk_label_get_use_markup:
  * @label: a #GtkLabel
  *
- * Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+ * Returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as marked up with
  * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+ * Return value: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_label_get_use_markup (GtkLabel *label)
diff --git a/gtk/gtklayout.c b/gtk/gtklayout.c
index 1c410d2..d3c5389 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklayout.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklayout.c
@@ -46,10 +46,10 @@
  * @Title: GtkLayout
  * @See_also: #GtkDrawingArea, #GtkScrolledWindow
  *
- * #GtkLayout is similar to #GtkDrawingArea in that it's a “blank slate”
+ * #GtkLayout is similar to #GtkDrawingArea in that it’s a “blank slate”
  * and doesn't do anything but paint a blank background by default. It's
  * different in that it supports scrolling natively (you can add it to a
- * #GtkScrolledWindow), and it can contain child widgets, since it's a
+ * #GtkScrolledWindow), and it can contain child widgets, since it’s a
  * #GtkContainer. However if you're just going to draw, a #GtkDrawingArea
  * is a better choice since it has lower overhead.
  *
@@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ gtk_layout_set_size (GtkLayout     *layout,
  *     @layout, or %NULL
  *
  * Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
- * the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+ * the total extents of the layout’s scrollbar area. See
  * gtk_layout_set_size ().
  **/
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtklevelbar.c b/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
index a6f3639..ce9118a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it's possible to
+ * The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to
  * modify the interval using gtk_level_bar_set_min_value() and
  * gtk_level_bar_set_max_value(). The value will be always drawn in proportion to
  * the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
  * as a finite and number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number
  * of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by
  * the admissible interval.
- * For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it's sufficient to
+ * For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to
  * set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator
  * mode to discrete.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkliststore.c b/gtk/gtkliststore.c
index 0217a53..9a38440 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkliststore.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkliststore.c
@@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ gtk_list_store_reorder_func (GSequenceIter *a,
  * @new_order: (array zero-terminated=1): an array of integers mapping the new
  *      position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering,
  *      i.e. @new_order`[newpos] = oldpos`. It must have
- *      exactly as many items as the list store's length.
+ *      exactly as many items as the list store’s length.
  *
  * Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
  * this function only works with unsorted stores.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmain.c b/gtk/gtkmain.c
index d4d1bd8..398bb85 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmain.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmain.c
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * It's OK to use the GLib main loop directly instead of gtk_main(), though it
+ * It’s OK to use the GLib main loop directly instead of gtk_main(), though it
  * involves slightly more typing. See #GMainLoop in the GLib documentation.
  */
 
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ static gboolean do_setlocale = TRUE;
  * gtk_parse_args() from automatically
  * calling `setlocale (LC_ALL, "")`. You would
  * want to use this function if you wanted to set the locale for
- * your program to something other than the user's locale, or if
+ * your program to something other than the user’s locale, or if
  * you wanted to set different values for different locale categories.
  *
  * Most programs should not need to call this function.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenu.c b/gtk/gtkmenu.c
index bb7cd27..7922698 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenu.c
@@ -2385,7 +2385,7 @@ gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state (GtkMenu *menu)
  * The title is displayed when the menu is shown as a tearoff
  * menu. If @title is %NULL, the menu will see if it is attached
  * to a parent menu item, and if so it will try to use the same
- * text as that menu item's label.
+ * text as that menu item’s label.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c b/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
index c0a1ff5..068a1fc 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
@@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ gtk_menu_button_get_align_widget (GtkMenuButton *menu_button)
  * @direction: a #GtkArrowType
  *
  * Sets the direction in which the menu will be popped up, as
- * well as changing the arrow's direction. The child will not
+ * well as changing the arrow’s direction. The child will not
  * be changed to an arrow if it was customized.
  *
  * If the menu when popped out would have collided with screen edges,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c b/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
index 09e3065..69fa4cb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
@@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_use_action_appearance (GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
  * @menu_item: a #GtkMenuItem
  * @submenu: (allow-none): the submenu, or %NULL
  *
- * Sets or replaces the menu item's submenu, or removes it when a %NULL
+ * Sets or replaces the menu item’s submenu, or removes it when a %NULL
  * submenu is passed.
  */
 void
@@ -2397,10 +2397,10 @@ _gtk_menu_item_refresh_accel_path (GtkMenuItem   *menu_item,
  * gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path:
  * @menu_item:  a valid #GtkMenuItem
  * @accel_path: (allow-none): accelerator path, corresponding to this menu
- *     item's functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
+ *     item’s functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
  *
  * Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime
- * changes of the menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be
+ * changes of the menu item’s accelerator caused by the user can be
  * identified and saved to persistent storage (see gtk_accel_map_save()
  * on this). To set up a default accelerator for this menu item, call
  * gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path. See also
@@ -2462,7 +2462,7 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path (GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
  * See gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() for details.
  *
  * Returns: the accelerator path corresponding to this menu
- *     item's functionality, or %NULL if not set
+ *     item’s functionality, or %NULL if not set
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenushell.c b/gtk/gtkmenushell.c
index d711e89..4cf34a8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenushell.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenushell.c
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ gtk_menu_shell_prepend (GtkMenuShell *menu_shell,
  * @position: The position in the item list where @child
  *     is added. Positions are numbered from 0 to n-1
  *
- * Adds a new #GtkMenuItem to the menu shell's item list
+ * Adds a new #GtkMenuItem to the menu shell’s item list
  * at the position indicated by @position.
  */
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
index 1b98e5d..cb71576 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu (GtkMenuToolButton *button)
 /**
  * gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text:
  * @button: a #GtkMenuToolButton
- * @text: text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
+ * @text: text to be used as tooltip text for button’s arrow button
  *
  * Sets the tooltip text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button which
  * pops up the menu.  See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() for setting a tooltip
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text (GtkMenuToolButton *button,
 /**
  * gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_markup:
  * @button: a #GtkMenuToolButton
- * @markup: markup text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
+ * @markup: markup text to be used as tooltip text for button’s arrow button
  *
  * Sets the tooltip markup text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button
  * which pops up the menu.  See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() for setting
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenutracker.c b/gtk/gtkmenutracker.c
index d9e57f3..2e650fb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenutracker.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenutracker.c
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ gtk_menu_tracker_section_find_model (GtkMenuTrackerSection *section,
  *
  * we only ever show separators if we have _actual_ children (ie: we do
  * not show a separator if the section contains only empty child
- * sections).  it's difficult to determine this on-the-fly, so we have
+ * sections).  it’s difficult to determine this on-the-fly, so we have
  * this separate function to come back later and figure it out.
  *
  * 'section' is that section.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenutrackeritem.c b/gtk/gtkmenutrackeritem.c
index f80ee65..8477a6b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenutrackeritem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenutrackeritem.c
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
  *
  * If an item is one of the non-normal classes (submenu, separator), only the
  * label of the item needs to be respected. Otherwise, all the properties
- * of the item contribute to the item's appearance and state.
+ * of the item contribute to the item’s appearance and state.
  *
  * Implementing the appearance of the menu item is up to toolkits, and certain
  * toolkits may choose to ignore certain properties, like icon or accel. The
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
  * Applications using submenus may want to lazily build their submenus in
  * response to the user clicking on it, as building a submenu may be expensive.
  *
- * Thus, the submenu has two special controls -- the submenu's visibility
+ * Thus, the submenu has two special controls -- the submenu’s visibility
  * should be controlled by the GtkMenuTrackerItem::submenu-shown property,
  * and if a user clicks on the submenu, do not immediately show the menu,
  * but call gtk_menu_tracker_item_request_submenu_shown() and wait for the
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c b/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
index 0362cf7..d023525 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
  * @See_also:#GtkDialog
  *
  * #GtkMessageDialog presents a dialog with an image representing the type of
- * message (Error, Question, etc.) alongside some message text. It's simply a
+ * message (Error, Question, etc.) alongside some message text. It’s simply a
  * convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of #GtkMessageDialog
  * from #GtkDialog without too much effort, but #GtkMessageDialog saves typing.
  *
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup (GtkWindow     *parent,
  * @dialog: a #GtkMessageDialog
  * @image: the image
  * 
- * Sets the dialog's image to @image.
+ * Sets the dialog’s image to @image.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -695,9 +695,9 @@ gtk_message_dialog_set_image (GtkMessageDialog *dialog,
  * gtk_message_dialog_get_image:
  * @dialog: a #GtkMessageDialog
  *
- * Gets the dialog's image.
+ * Gets the dialog’s image.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the dialog's image
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the dialog’s image
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -845,9 +845,9 @@ gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (GtkMessageDialog *message_dialog,
  * @message_dialog: a #GtkMessageDialog
  *
  * Returns the message area of the dialog. This is the box where the
- * dialog's primary and secondary labels are packed. You can add your
+ * dialog’s primary and secondary labels are packed. You can add your
  * own extra content to that box and it will appear below those labels,
- * on the right side of the dialog's image (or on the left for right-to-left
+ * on the right side of the dialog’s image (or on the left for right-to-left
  * languages).  See gtk_dialog_get_content_area() for the corresponding
  * function in the parent #GtkDialog.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtknumerableicon.c b/gtk/gtknumerableicon.c
index 84fba13..836e1a7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtknumerableicon.c
+++ b/gtk/gtknumerableicon.c
@@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ gtk_numerable_icon_set_count (GtkNumerableIcon *self,
  * @self: a #GtkNumerableIcon
  *
  * Returns the #GtkStyleContext used by the icon for theming,
- * or %NULL if there's none.
+ * or %NULL if there’s none.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkStyleContext, or %NULL.
  *     This object is internal to GTK+ and should not be unreffed.
@@ -903,7 +903,7 @@ gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_gicon (GtkNumerableIcon *self,
  * @self: a #GtkNumerableIcon
  *
  * Returns the #GIcon that was set as the base background image, or
- * %NULL if there's none. The caller of this function does not own
+ * %NULL if there’s none. The caller of this function does not own
  * a reference to the returned #GIcon.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): a #GIcon, or %NULL
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_icon_name (GtkNumerableIcon *self,
  * @self: a #GtkNumerableIcon
  *
  * Returns the icon name used as the base background image,
- * or %NULL if there's none.
+ * or %NULL if there’s none.
  *
  * Returns: an icon name, or %NULL
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkorientable.c b/gtk/gtkorientable.c
index 0f72542..cb9994d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkorientable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkorientable.c
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ gtk_orientable_default_init (GtkOrientableInterface *iface)
 /**
  * gtk_orientable_set_orientation:
  * @orientable: a #GtkOrientable
- * @orientation: the orientable's new orientation.
+ * @orientation: the orientable’s new orientation.
  *
  * Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkpaned.c b/gtk/gtkpaned.c
index e97de29..9c4b07a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkpaned.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkpaned.c
@@ -1873,7 +1873,7 @@ gtk_paned_motion (GtkWidget      *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_paned_new:
- * @orientation: the paned's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the paned’s orientation.
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
  *
@@ -2832,7 +2832,7 @@ gtk_paned_toggle_handle_focus (GtkPaned *paned)
  * enables the callback to distinguish between the window
  * of the paned, a child and the handle.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the paned's handle window.
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the paned’s handle window.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
index 8df2255..97034ec 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 /*
  *  GtkPlacesSidebar - sidebar widget for places in the filesystem
  *
- *  This code comes from Nautilus, GNOME's file manager.
+ *  This code comes from Nautilus, GNOME’s file manager.
  *
  *  This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
  *  modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
  * @See_also: #GtkFileChooser
  *
  * #GtkPlacesSidebar is a widget that displays a list of frequently-used places in the
- * file system:  the user's home directory, the user's bookmarks, and volumes and drives.
+ * file system:  the user’s home directory, the user’s bookmarks, and volumes and drives.
  * This widget is used as a sidebar in #GtkFileChooser and may be used by file managers
  * and similar programs.
  *
@@ -4524,7 +4524,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_set_location (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  *
  * Gets the currently-selected location in the @sidebar.  This can be #NULL when
  * nothing is selected, for example, when gtk_places_sidebar_set_location() has
- * been called with a location that is not among the sidebar's list of places to
+ * been called with a location that is not among the sidebar’s list of places to
  * show.
  *
  * You can use this function to get the selection in the @sidebar.  Also, if you
@@ -4569,7 +4569,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_get_location (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar)
  *
  * Sets whether the @sidebar should show an item for the Desktop folder.
  * The default value for this option is determined by the desktop
- * environment and the user's configuration, but this function can be
+ * environment and the user’s configuration, but this function can be
  * used to override it on a per-application basis.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -4731,7 +4731,7 @@ find_shortcut_link (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  * shortcuts.  The shortcuts are application-specific; they are not shared
  * across applications, and they are not persistent.  If this function
  * is called multiple times with different locations, then they are added
- * to the sidebar's list in the same order as the function is called.
+ * to the sidebar’s list in the same order as the function is called.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.h b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.h
index 47af0f1..a358f5b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.h
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 /*
  *  GtkPlacesSidebar - sidebar widget for places in the filesystem
  *
- *  This code comes from Nautilus, GNOME's file manager.
+ *  This code comes from Nautilus, GNOME’s file manager.
  *
  *  This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
  *  modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
diff --git a/gtk/gtkplug.c b/gtk/gtkplug.c
index ae24dd6..8482dce 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkplug.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkplug.c
@@ -49,10 +49,10 @@
  * Together with #GtkSocket, #GtkPlug provides the ability to embed
  * widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is
  * transparent to the user. One process creates a #GtkSocket widget
- * and passes the ID of that widget's window to the other process,
+ * and passes the ID of that widget’s window to the other process,
  * which then creates a #GtkPlug with that window ID. Any widgets
  * contained in the #GtkPlug then will appear inside the first
- * application's window.
+ * application’s window.
  *
  * The communication between a #GtkSocket and a #GtkPlug follows the
  * [XEmbed Protocol](http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/xembed-spec).
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ _gtk_plug_remove_from_socket (GtkPlug   *plug,
 /**
  * gtk_plug_construct:
  * @plug: a #GtkPlug.
- * @socket_id: the XID of the socket's window.
+ * @socket_id: the XID of the socket’s window.
  *
  * Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
  * @socket_id. This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
@@ -556,9 +556,9 @@ gtk_plug_construct (GtkPlug *plug,
 /**
  * gtk_plug_construct_for_display:
  * @plug: a #GtkPlug.
- * @display: the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's 
+ * @display: the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id’s 
  *          #GtkSocket.
- * @socket_id: the XID of the socket's window.
+ * @socket_id: the XID of the socket’s window.
  *
  * Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
  * @socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
@@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ gtk_plug_new (Window socket_id)
 /**
  * gtk_plug_new_for_display:
  * @display: the #GdkDisplay on which @socket_id is displayed
- * @socket_id: the XID of the socket's window.
+ * @socket_id: the XID of the socket’s window.
  * 
  * Create a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified by socket_id.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprinter.c b/gtk/gtkprinter.c
index d809736..a395920 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprinter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprinter.c
@@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ _gtk_printer_create_cairo_surface (GtkPrinter       *printer,
  * @printer: a #GtkPrinter
  * 
  * Lists all the paper sizes @printer supports.
- * This will return and empty list unless the printer's details are 
+ * This will return and empty list unless the printer’s details are 
  * available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
  * Return value: (element-type GtkPageSetup) (transfer full): a newly allocated list of newly allocated 
#GtkPageSetup s.
@@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_default_page_size (GtkPrinter *printer)
  * Retrieve the hard margins of @printer, i.e. the margins that define
  * the area at the borders of the paper that the printer cannot print to.
  *
- * Note: This will not succeed unless the printer's details are available,
+ * Note: This will not succeed unless the printer’s details are available,
  * see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
  * Return value: %TRUE iff the hard margins were retrieved
@@ -1019,16 +1019,16 @@ gtk_printer_get_hard_margins (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * gtk_printer_get_capabilities:
  * @printer: a #GtkPrinter
  * 
- * Returns the printer's capabilities.
+ * Returns the printer’s capabilities.
  *
- * This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities 
+ * This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog’s manual-capabilities 
  * setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which 
  * you must handle yourself.
  *
- * This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
+ * This will return 0 unless the printer’s details are available, see
  * gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
- * Return value: the printer's capabilities
+ * Return value: the printer’s capabilities
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprivate.c b/gtk/gtkprivate.c
index fb1c6b5..c6d166f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprivate.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprivate.c
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ _gtk_get_data_prefix (void)
  * names spelled out in English.
  * However, this function does check the above environment
  * variables, and does return a Unix-style locale string based on
- * either said environment variables or the thread's current locale.
+ * either said environment variables or the thread’s current locale.
  *
  * Return value: a dynamically allocated string, free with g_free().
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c b/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
index 097d9b5..103bf15 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
@@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_set_activity_mode (GtkProgressBar *pbar,
 /**
  * gtk_progress_bar_set_fraction:
  * @pbar: a #GtkProgressBar
- * @fraction: fraction of the task that's been completed
+ * @fraction: fraction of the task that’s been completed
  *
  * Causes the progress bar to “fill in” the given fraction
  * of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
@@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_get_text (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
  * gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction:
  * @pbar: a #GtkProgressBar
  *
- * Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+ * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
  *
  * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkquartz.c b/gtk/gtkquartz.c
index 722a00b..ba204f3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkquartz.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkquartz.c
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ _gtk_quartz_set_selection_data_for_pasteboard (NSPasteboard     *pasteboard,
 
 /* Bundle-based functions for various directories. These almost work
  * even when the application isn't in a bundle, becuase mainBundle
- * paths point to the bin directory in that case. It's a simple matter
+ * paths point to the bin directory in that case. It’s a simple matter
  * to test for that and remove the last element.
  */
 
diff --git a/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c b/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
index fc77444..0d93796 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ gtk_radio_button_get_property (GObject    *object,
  * @group: (element-type GtkRadioButton) (allow-none): an existing radio
  *     button group, such as one returned from gtk_radio_button_get_group(), or %NULL.
  *
- * Sets a #GtkRadioButton's group. It should be noted that this does not change
+ * Sets a #GtkRadioButton’s group. It should be noted that this does not change
  * the layout of your interface in any way, so if you are changing the group,
  * it is likely you will need to re-arrange the user interface to reflect these
  * changes.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrange.c b/gtk/gtkrange.c
index dee4512..fc16d4b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrange.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrange.c
@@ -937,8 +937,8 @@ gtk_range_get_flippable (GtkRange *range)
  * @range: a #GtkRange
  * @size_fixed: %TRUE to make the slider size constant
  *
- * Sets whether the range's slider has a fixed size, or a size that
- * depends on its adjustment's page size.
+ * Sets whether the range’s slider has a fixed size, or a size that
+ * depends on its adjustment’s page size.
  *
  * This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
  *
@@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
  *
- * Return value: whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
+ * Return value: whether the range’s slider has a fixed size.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -990,9 +990,9 @@ gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed (GtkRange *range)
 /**
  * gtk_range_set_min_slider_size:
  * @range: a #GtkRange
- * @min_size: The slider's minimum size
+ * @min_size: The slider’s minimum size
  *
- * Sets the minimum size of the range's slider.
+ * Sets the minimum size of the range’s slider.
  *
  * This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
  *
@@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ gtk_range_set_min_slider_size (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * See gtk_range_set_min_slider_size().
  *
- * Return value: The minimum size of the range's slider.
+ * Return value: The minimum size of the range’s slider.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ gtk_range_get_min_slider_size (GtkRange *range)
  * @range: a #GtkRange
  * @range_rect: (out): return location for the range rectangle
  *
- * This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
+ * This function returns the area that contains the range’s trough
  * and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
  *
  * This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
@@ -1108,10 +1108,10 @@ gtk_range_get_slider_range (GtkRange *range,
 /**
  * gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity:
  * @range:       a #GtkRange
- * @sensitivity: the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+ * @sensitivity: the lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
- * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+ * 'lower' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1142,9 +1142,9 @@ gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity (GtkRange           *range,
  * @range: a #GtkRange
  *
  * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
- * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+ * 'lower' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+ * Return value: The lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1159,10 +1159,10 @@ gtk_range_get_lower_stepper_sensitivity (GtkRange *range)
 /**
  * gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity:
  * @range:       a #GtkRange
- * @sensitivity: the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
+ * @sensitivity: the upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
- * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+ * 'upper' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1193,9 +1193,9 @@ gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity (GtkRange           *range,
  * @range: a #GtkRange
  *
  * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
- * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+ * 'upper' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
+ * Return value: The upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1432,12 +1432,12 @@ gtk_range_get_restrict_to_fill_level (GtkRange *range)
  * would indicate the current play position, and the fill level would
  * be the position up to which the file/stream has been downloaded.
  *
- * This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range's trough
+ * This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range’s trough
  * and is themeable separately from the trough. To enable fill level
  * display, use gtk_range_set_show_fill_level(). The range defaults
  * to not showing the fill level.
  *
- * Additionally, it's possible to restrict the range's slider position
+ * Additionally, it’s possible to restrict the range’s slider position
  * to values which are smaller than the fill level. This is controller
  * by gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level() and is by default
  * enabled.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
index f6afd2b..ba512a4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
@@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers (GtkRecentChooserMenu *menu)
  *
  * Sets whether a number should be added to the items of @menu.  The
  * numbers are shown to provide a unique character for a mnemonic to
- * be used inside ten menu item's label.  Only the first the items
+ * be used inside ten menu item’s label.  Only the first the items
  * get a number to avoid clashes.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c b/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
index 3b10ef9..2268c57 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_set_filename (GtkRecentManager *manager,
 
 /* reads the recently used resources file and builds the items list.
  * we keep the items list inside the parser object, and build the
- * RecentInfo object only on user's demand to avoid useless replication.
+ * RecentInfo object only on user’s demand to avoid useless replication.
  * this function resets the dirty bit of the manager.
  */
 static void
@@ -1641,10 +1641,10 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_mime_type (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * gtk_recent_info_get_added:
  * @info: a #GtkRecentInfo
  *
- * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+ * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the resource
  * was added to the recently used resources list.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+ * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1661,10 +1661,10 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_added (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * gtk_recent_info_get_modified:
  * @info: a #GtkRecentInfo
  *
- * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the meta-data
+ * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
  * for the resource was last modified.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+ * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1681,10 +1681,10 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_modified (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * gtk_recent_info_get_visited:
  * @info: a #GtkRecentInfo
  *
- * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the meta-data
+ * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
  * for the resource was last visited.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+ * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2263,12 +2263,12 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_short_name (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * gtk_recent_info_get_uri_display:
  * @info: a #GtkRecentInfo
  *
- * Gets a displayable version of the resource's URI.  If the resource
+ * Gets a displayable version of the resource’s URI.  If the resource
  * is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
  * it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk_recent_info_get_uri().
  *
  * Return value: a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
- *   resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
+ *   resource’s URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscale.c b/gtk/gtkscale.c
index cf1a39b..5a10401 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscale.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscale.c
@@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ gtk_scale_get_property (GObject      *object,
 
 /**
  * gtk_scale_new:
- * @orientation: the scale's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the scale’s orientation.
  * @adjustment: (allow-none): the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range
  *              of the scale, or %NULL to create a new adjustment.
  *
@@ -592,14 +592,14 @@ gtk_scale_new (GtkOrientation  orientation,
 
 /**
  * gtk_scale_new_with_range:
- * @orientation: the scale's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the scale’s orientation.
  * @min: minimum value
  * @max: maximum value
  * @step: step increment (tick size) used with keyboard shortcuts
  *
  * Creates a new scale widget with the given orientation that lets the
  * user input a number between @min and @max (including @min and @max)
- * with the increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it's the distance
+ * with the increment @step.  @step must be nonzero; it’s the distance
  * the slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale
  * value.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c b/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
index fd76382..187fd14 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ gtk_scale_button_set_icons (GtkScaleButton  *button,
  * gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment:
  * @button: a #GtkScaleButton
  *
- * Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+ * Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton’s scale.
  * See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): the adjustment associated with the scale
@@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment     (GtkScaleButton *button)
  * @adjustment: a #GtkAdjustment
  *
  * Sets the #GtkAdjustment to be used as a model
- * for the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+ * for the #GtkScaleButton’s scale.
  * See gtk_range_set_adjustment() for details.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrollable.c b/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
index 0ed52e7..0c4f67a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
  *
  * All scrollable widgets should do the following.
  *
- * - When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget's adjustments,
+ * - When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments,
  *   the widget should populate the adjustments'
  *   #GtkAdjustment:lower, #GtkAdjustment:upper,
  *   #GtkAdjustment:step-increment, #GtkAdjustment:page-increment and
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c b/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
index ecd4c7e..4fe7c87 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ gtk_scrollbar_style_updated (GtkWidget *widget)
 
 /**
  * gtk_scrollbar_new:
- * @orientation: the scrollbar's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the scrollbar’s orientation.
  * @adjustment: (allow-none): the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment.
  *
  * Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c b/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
index 9ebb1d9..5d23930 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
  * @Title: GtkScrolledWindow
  * @See_also: #GtkScrollable, #GtkViewport, #GtkAdjustment
  *
- * #GtkScrolledWindow is a #GtkBin subclass: it's a container
+ * #GtkScrolledWindow is a #GtkBin subclass: it’s a container
  * the accepts a single child widget. #GtkScrolledWindow adds scrollbars
  * to the child widget and optionally draws a beveled frame around the
  * child widget.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
  * for example the PageDown key).
  *
  * If a #GtkScrolledWindow doesn't behave quite as you would like, or
- * doesn't have exactly the right layout, it's very possible to set up
+ * doesn't have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up
  * your own scrolling with #GtkScrollbar and for example a #GtkGrid.
  */
 
@@ -117,8 +117,8 @@
  * B) from 1.1) follows: the requisition may be overidden by usize of the scrolled
  *    window (done automatically) or by usize of the child (needs to be checked).
  * C) from 2) follows: for POLICY_NEVER, the scrolled window simply reports the
- *    child's dimension.
- * D) from 3) follows: the scrolled window child's minimum width and minimum height
+ *    child’s dimension.
+ * D) from 3) follows: the scrolled window child’s minimum width and minimum height
  *    under A) at least correspond to the space taken up by its scrollbars.
  */
 
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_init (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window)
  *
  * Creates a new scrolled window.
  *
- * The two arguments are the scrolled window's adjustments; these will be
+ * The two arguments are the scrolled window’s adjustments; these will be
  * shared with the scrollbars and the child widget to keep the bars in sync 
  * with the child. Usually you want to pass %NULL for the adjustments, which 
  * will cause the scrolled window to create them for you.
@@ -755,8 +755,8 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_set_vadjustment (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  * gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment:
  * @scrolled_window: a #GtkScrolledWindow
  *
- * Returns the horizontal scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
- * horizontal scrollbar to the child widget's horizontal scroll
+ * Returns the horizontal scrollbar’s adjustment, used to connect the
+ * horizontal scrollbar to the child widget’s horizontal scroll
  * functionality.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
@@ -779,8 +779,8 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window)
  * gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment:
  * @scrolled_window: a #GtkScrolledWindow
  * 
- * Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
- * vertical scrollbar to the child widget's vertical scroll functionality.
+ * Returns the vertical scrollbar’s adjustment, used to connect the
+ * vertical scrollbar to the child widget’s vertical scroll functionality.
  * 
  * Returns: (transfer none): the vertical #GtkAdjustment
  */
@@ -3040,7 +3040,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  * _gtk_scrolled_window_get_spacing:
  * @scrolled_window: a scrolled window
  * 
- * Gets the spacing between the scrolled window's scrollbars and
+ * Gets the spacing between the scrolled window’s scrollbars and
  * the scrolled widget. Used by GtkCombo
  * 
  * Return value: the spacing, in pixels.
diff --git a/gtk/gtksearchbar.c b/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
index 7bffdf7..38d2611 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
  * #GtkSearchBar is a container made to have a search entry (possibly
  * with additional connex widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons)
  * built-in. The search bar would appear when a search is started through
- * typing on the keyboard, or the application's search mode is toggled on.
+ * typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.
  *
  * For keyboard presses to start a search, events will need to be
  * forwarded from the top-level window that contains the search bar.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkselection.c b/gtk/gtkselection.c
index 783f1e7..d3878a7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkselection.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkselection.c
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
 
 /* This file implements most of the work of the ICCCM selection protocol.
  * The code was written after an intensive study of the equivalent part
- * of John Ousterhout's Tk toolkit, and does many things in much the 
+ * of John Ousterhout’s Tk toolkit, and does many things in much the 
  * same way.
  *
  * The one thing in the ICCCM that isn't fully supported here (or in Tk)
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@
  * #GtkClipboard provides a nicer interface to the same functionality.
  *
  * Some of the datatypes defined this section are used in
- * the #GtkClipboard and drag-and-drop API's as well. The
+ * the #GtkClipboard and drag-and-drop API’s as well. The
  * #GtkTargetEntry and #GtkTargetList objects represent
  * lists of data types that are supported when sending or
  * receiving data. The #GtkSelectionData object is used to
diff --git a/gtk/gtkseparator.c b/gtk/gtkseparator.c
index 663c418..de887fb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkseparator.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkseparator.c
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ gtk_separator_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_separator_new:
- * @orientation: the separator's orientation.
+ * @orientation: the separator’s orientation.
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtksizerequest.c b/gtk/gtksizerequest.c
index cd23440..7ac4fa0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksizerequest.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksizerequest.c
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_request_mode (GtkWidget *widget)
  * @minimum_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
  * @natural_width: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural width, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural width.
+ * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
  *
  * This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
  *
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_preferred_width (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @minimum_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the minimum height, or %NULL
  * @natural_height: (out) (allow-none): location to store the natural height, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural height.
+ * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
  *
  * This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
  *
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_preferred_height (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @minimum_width: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the minimum width, or %NULL
  * @natural_width: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the natural width, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a widget's minimum and natural width if it would be given
+ * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
  * the specified @height.
  *
  * The returned request will be modified by the
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @minimum_height: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the minimum height, or %NULL
  * @natural_height: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the natural height, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a widget's minimum and natural height if it would be given
+ * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
  * the specified @width.
  *
  * The returned request will be modified by the
@@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_for_width (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @minimum_baseline: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the baseline for the minimum height, or %NULL
  * @natural_baseline: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the baseline for the natural height, or %NULL
  *
- * Retrieves a widget's minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
+ * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
  * the specified @width, or the default height if @width is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
  * that no baseline is requested for this widget.
  *
@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the natural size, or %NULL
  *
  * Retrieves the minimum and natural size  and the corresponding baselines of a widget, taking
- * into account the widget's preference for height-for-width management. The baselines may
+ * into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management. The baselines may
  * be -1 which means that no baseline is requested for this widget.
  *
  * This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
@@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ _gtk_widget_get_preferred_size_and_baseline (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * @natural_size: (out) (allow-none): location for storing the natural size, or %NULL
  *
  * Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
- * into account the widget's preference for height-for-width management.
+ * into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
  *
  * This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
  * not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
diff --git a/gtk/gtksocket.c b/gtk/gtksocket.c
index a8293e4..0bd7bc6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksocket.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksocket.c
@@ -60,11 +60,11 @@
  * Together with #GtkPlug, #GtkSocket provides the ability to embed
  * widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that
  * is transparent to the user. One process creates a #GtkSocket widget
- * and passes that widget's window ID to the other process, which then
+ * and passes that widget’s window ID to the other process, which then
  * creates a #GtkPlug with that window ID. Any widgets contained in the
- * #GtkPlug then will appear inside the first application's window.
+ * #GtkPlug then will appear inside the first application’s window.
  *
- * The socket's window ID is obtained by using gtk_socket_get_id().
+ * The socket’s window ID is obtained by using gtk_socket_get_id().
  * Before using this function, the socket must have been realized,
  * and for hence, have been added to its parent.
  *
@@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ gtk_socket_forall (GtkContainer *container,
  * gtk_socket_add_window:
  * @socket: a #GtkSocket
  * @xid: the native identifier for a window
- * @need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
+ * @need_reparent: whether the socket’s plug’s window needs to be
  *                 reparented to the socket
  *
  * Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c b/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
index 0a2c2b1..999ce59 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
@@ -2155,7 +2155,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_new_with_range (gdouble min,
 }
 
 /* Callback used when the spin button's adjustment changes.
- * We need to redraw the arrows when the adjustment's range
+ * We need to redraw the arrows when the adjustment’s range
  * changes, and reevaluate our size request.
  */
 static void
@@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
 /**
  * gtk_spin_button_set_digits:
  * @spin_button: a #GtkSpinButton
- * @digits: the number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button's value
+ * @digits: the number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button’s value
  *
  * Set the precision to be displayed by @spin_button. Up to 20 digit precision
  * is allowed.
@@ -2284,7 +2284,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_get_digits (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
  * @page: increment applied for a button 2 press.
  *
  * Sets the step and page increments for spin_button.  This affects how
- * quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
+ * quickly the value changes when the spin button’s arrows are activated.
  **/
 void
 gtk_spin_button_set_increments (GtkSpinButton *spin_button,
@@ -2578,7 +2578,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_wrap (GtkSpinButton  *spin_button,
  * gtk_spin_button_get_wrap:
  * @spin_button: a #GtkSpinButton
  *
- * Returns whether the spin button's value wraps around to the
+ * Returns whether the spin button’s value wraps around to the
  * opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is
  * exceeded. See gtk_spin_button_set_wrap().
  *
@@ -2647,7 +2647,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_get_snap_to_ticks (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
  * @direction: a #GtkSpinType indicating the direction to spin
  * @increment: step increment to apply in the specified direction
  *
- * Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified
+ * Increment or decrement a spin button’s value in a specified
  * direction by a specified amount.
  */
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstatusbar.c b/gtk/gtkstatusbar.c
index b7aba0f..eeabaae 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstatusbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkstatusbar.c
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
  * is complete in an FTP client, for example).
  *
  * Status bars in GTK+ maintain a stack of messages. The message at
- * the top of the each bar's stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
+ * the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
  *
- * Any messages added to a statusbar's stack must specify a
+ * Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a
  * context id that is used to uniquely identify
  * the source of a message. This context id can be generated by
  * gtk_statusbar_get_context_id(), given a message and the statusbar that
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
  *
  * Status bars are created using gtk_statusbar_new().
  *
- * Messages are added to the bar's stack with gtk_statusbar_push().
+ * Messages are added to the bar’s stack with gtk_statusbar_push().
  *
  * The message at the top of the stack can be removed using
  * gtk_statusbar_pop(). A message can be removed from anywhere in the
@@ -304,11 +304,11 @@ gtk_statusbar_msg_free (GtkStatusbarMsg *msg)
 /**
  * gtk_statusbar_push:
  * @statusbar: a #GtkStatusbar
- * @context_id: the message's context id, as returned by
+ * @context_id: the message’s context id, as returned by
  *              gtk_statusbar_get_context_id()
  * @text: the message to add to the statusbar
  * 
- * Pushes a new message onto a statusbar's stack.
+ * Pushes a new message onto a statusbar’s stack.
  *
  * Returns: a message id that can be used with 
  *          gtk_statusbar_remove().
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ gtk_statusbar_push (GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
  * @statusbar: a #GtkStatusbar
  * @context_id: a context identifier
  * 
- * Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusbar's stack
+ * Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusbar’s stack
  * with the given context id. 
  *
  * Note that this may not change the displayed message, if 
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ gtk_statusbar_pop (GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
  * @context_id: a context identifier
  * @message_id: a message identifier, as returned by gtk_statusbar_push()
  *
- * Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar's stack. 
+ * Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar’s stack. 
  * The exact @context_id and @message_id must be specified.
  */
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstylecontext.c b/gtk/gtkstylecontext.c
index 4a63c9e..c1b51cf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstylecontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkstylecontext.c
@@ -1511,9 +1511,9 @@ gtk_style_context_get_scale (GtkStyleContext *context)
  *
  * If @progress is not %NULL, the animation progress will be returned
  * there, 0.0 means the state is closest to being unset, while 1.0 means
- * it's closest to being set. This means transition animation will
+ * it’s closest to being set. This means transition animation will
  * run from 0 to 1 when @state is being set and from 1 to 0 when
- * it's being unset.
+ * it’s being unset.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if there is a running transition animation for @state.
  *
@@ -4285,7 +4285,7 @@ gtk_render_extension (GtkStyleContext *context,
  * @height: rectangle height
  *
  * Renders a handle (as in #GtkHandleBox, #GtkPaned and
- * #GtkWindow<!-- -->'s resize grip), in the rectangle
+ * #GtkWindow<!-- -->’s resize grip), in the rectangle
  * determined by @x, @y, @width, @height.
  *
  * Handles rendered for the paned and grip classes:
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstylecontext.h b/gtk/gtkstylecontext.h
index 870d9c1..55540b0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstylecontext.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkstylecontext.h
@@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ struct _GtkStyleContextClass
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_PADDING:
  *
- * A property holding the rendered element's padding as a #GtkBorder. The
+ * A property holding the rendered element’s padding as a #GtkBorder. The
  * padding is defined as the spacing between the inner part of the element border
- * and its child. It's the innermost spacing property of the padding/border/margin
+ * and its child. It’s the innermost spacing property of the padding/border/margin
  * series.
  */
 #define GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_PADDING "padding"
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ struct _GtkStyleContextClass
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_WIDTH:
  *
- * A property holding the rendered element's border width in pixels as
+ * A property holding the rendered element’s border width in pixels as
  * a #GtkBorder. The border is the intermediary spacing property of the
  * padding/border/margin series.
  *
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ struct _GtkStyleContextClass
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_MARGIN:
  *
- * A property holding the rendered element's margin as a #GtkBorder. The
+ * A property holding the rendered element’s margin as a #GtkBorder. The
  * margin is defined as the spacing between the border of the element
  * and its surrounding elements. It is external to #GtkWidget<!-- -->s's
  * size allocations, and the most external spacing property of the
@@ -120,28 +120,28 @@ struct _GtkStyleContextClass
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_RADIUS:
  *
- * A property holding the rendered element's border radius in pixels as a #gint.
+ * A property holding the rendered element’s border radius in pixels as a #gint.
  */
 #define GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_RADIUS "border-radius"
 
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_STYLE:
  *
- * A property holding the element's border style as a #GtkBorderStyle.
+ * A property holding the element’s border style as a #GtkBorderStyle.
  */
 #define GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_STYLE "border-style"
 
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_COLOR:
  *
- * A property holding the element's border color as a #GdkRGBA.
+ * A property holding the element’s border color as a #GdkRGBA.
  */
 #define GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_COLOR "border-color"
 
 /**
  * GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BACKGROUND_IMAGE:
  *
- * A property holding the element's background as a #cairo_pattern_t.
+ * A property holding the element’s background as a #cairo_pattern_t.
  */
 #define GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BACKGROUND_IMAGE "background-image"
 
diff --git a/gtk/gtktestutils.c b/gtk/gtktestutils.c
index 5fe60b7..e07a14d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktestutils.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktestutils.c
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  *
  * It will in turn call g_test_init() and gtk_init() to properly
  * initialize the testing framework and graphical toolkit. It'll 
- * also set the program's locale to “C” and prevent loading of rc 
+ * also set the program’s locale to “C” and prevent loading of rc 
  * files and Gtk+ modules. This is done to make tets program
  * environments as deterministic as possible.
  *
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ gtk_test_widget_click (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * This function will generate a @button click in the upwards or downwards
  * spin button arrow areas, usually leading to an increase or decrease of
- * spin button's value.
+ * spin button’s value.
  *
  * Returns: whether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextattributes.h b/gtk/gtktextattributes.h
index b64e0e7..0e2f85b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextattributes.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktextattributes.h
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkTextAppearance GtkTextAppearance;
  * @strikethrough: Strikethrough style
  * @draw_bg: Whether to use background-related values; this is
  *   irrelevant for the values struct when in a tag, but is used for
- *   the composite values struct; it's true if any of the tags being
+ *   the composite values struct; it’s true if any of the tags being
  *   composited had background stuff set.
  * @inside_selection: This are only used when we are actually laying
  *   out and rendering a paragraph; not when a #GtkTextAppearance is
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ struct _GtkTextAppearance
  * @editable: Can edit this text.
  *
  * Using #GtkTextAttributes directly should rarely be necessary.
- * It's primarily useful with gtk_text_iter_get_attributes().
+ * It’s primarily useful with gtk_text_iter_get_attributes().
  * As with most GTK+ structs, the fields in this struct should only
  * be read, never modified directly.
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbtree.c b/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
index 2757c8c..bce15e3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
@@ -6159,7 +6159,7 @@ recompute_level_nonzero_counts (GtkTextBTreeNode *node)
  *      This procedure is called to recompute all the counts in a GtkTextBTreeNode
  *      (tags, child information, etc.) by scanning the information in
  *      its descendants.  This procedure is called during rebalancing
- *      when a GtkTextBTreeNode's child structure has changed.
+ *      when a GtkTextBTreeNode’s child structure has changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *      None.
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c b/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
index 8919e11..af7b683 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ _gtk_text_buffer_get_btree (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  *
  * Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the buffer's tag table
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the buffer’s tag table
  **/
 GtkTextTagTable*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -2100,7 +2100,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_set_mark (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * Creates a mark at position @where. If @mark_name is %NULL, the mark
  * is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieved by name using
  * gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left gravity, and text is
- * inserted at the mark's current location, the mark will be moved to
+ * inserted at the mark’s current location, the mark will be moved to
  * the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity
  * (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the right of
  * newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark
@@ -2215,7 +2215,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_mark (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * @buffer: a #GtkTextBuffer
  * @mark: a #GtkTextMark in @buffer
  *
- * Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
+ * Deletes @mark, so that it’s no longer located anywhere in the
  * buffer. Removes the reference the buffer holds to the mark, so if
  * you haven't called g_object_ref() on the mark, it will be freed. Even
  * if the mark isn't freed, most operations on @mark become
@@ -2362,7 +2362,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_insert (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  * “selection_bound” and “insert” marks. If “selection_bound” and
  * “insert” are in the same place, then there is no current selection.
  * gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds() is another convenient function
- * for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there's a
+ * for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there’s a
  * selection and what its bounds are.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): selection bound mark
@@ -2467,8 +2467,8 @@ gtk_text_buffer_select_range (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  *
  * Creates a tag and adds it to the tag table for @buffer.
  * Equivalent to calling gtk_text_tag_new() and then adding the
- * tag to the buffer's tag table. The returned tag is owned by
- * the buffer's tag table, so the ref count will be equal to one.
+ * tag to the buffer’s tag table. The returned tag is owned by
+ * the buffer’s tag table, so the ref count will be equal to one.
  *
  * If @tag_name is %NULL, the tag is anonymous.
  *
@@ -2661,7 +2661,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * @start: one bound of range to be tagged
  * @end: other bound of range to be tagged
  *
- * Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+ * Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer’s tag table to
  * get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
  **/
 void
@@ -2698,7 +2698,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * @start: one bound of range to be untagged
  * @end: other bound of range to be untagged
  *
- * Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+ * Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer’s tag table to
  * get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag().
  **/
 void
@@ -4028,7 +4028,7 @@ cut_or_copy (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * @default_editable: default editability of the buffer
  *
  * Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard, then deletes
- * said text if it's editable.
+ * said text if it’s editable.
  **/
 void
 gtk_text_buffer_cut_clipboard (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c b/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
index 996d624..cd4e87a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
@@ -56,16 +56,16 @@ static GQuark    deserialize_quark (void);
 /**
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format:
  * @buffer: a #GtkTextBuffer
- * @mime_type: the format's mime-type
+ * @mime_type: the format’s mime-type
  * @function: the serialize function to register
- * @user_data: @function's user_data
+ * @user_data: @function’s user_data
  * @user_data_destroy: a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
  *
  * This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
  * its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
- *               newly registered format's mime-type.
+ *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -103,10 +103,10 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format (GtkTextBuffer              *buffer,
  * @buffer: a #GtkTextBuffer
  * @tagset_name: (allow-none): an optional tagset name, on %NULL
  *
- * This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+ * This function registers GTK+’s internal rich text serialization
  * format with the passed @buffer. The internal format does not comply
  * to any standard rich text format and only works between #GtkTextBuffer
- * instances. It is capable of serializing all of a text buffer's tags
+ * instances. It is capable of serializing all of a text buffer’s tags
  * and embedded pixbufs.
  *
  * This function is just a wrapper around
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format (GtkTextBuffer              *buffer,
  * receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
- *               newly registered format's mime-type.
+ *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -154,16 +154,16 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
 /**
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format:
  * @buffer: a #GtkTextBuffer
- * @mime_type: the format's mime-type
+ * @mime_type: the format’s mime-type
  * @function: the deserialize function to register
- * @user_data: @function's user_data
+ * @user_data: @function’s user_data
  * @user_data_destroy: a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
  *
  * This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
  * its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
- *               newly registered format's mime-type.
+ *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -201,12 +201,12 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format (GtkTextBuffer                *buffe
  * @buffer: a #GtkTextBuffer
  * @tagset_name: (allow-none): an optional tagset name, on %NULL
  *
- * This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+ * This function registers GTK+’s internal rich text serialization
  * format with the passed @buffer. See
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
- *               newly registered format's mime-type.
+ *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_unregister_deserialize_format (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  *
  * You should allow creation of tags only if you know what you are
  * doing, e.g. if you defined a tagset name for your application
- * suite's text buffers and you know that it's fine to receive new
+ * suite’s text buffers and you know that it’s fine to receive new
  * tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can
  * handle the newly created tags.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextiter.c b/gtk/gtktextiter.c
index b3a7f2a..e033379 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextiter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextiter.c
@@ -1492,7 +1492,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_language (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * i.e. if gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset () would return 0.
  * However this function is potentially more efficient than
  * gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset () because it doesn't have to compute
- * the offset, it just has to see whether it's 0.
+ * the offset, it just has to see whether it’s 0.
  *
  * Return value: whether @iter begins a line
  **/
@@ -1792,7 +1792,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_attributes (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
  * (MOVEMENT OCCURRED && NEW ITER IS DEREFERENCEABLE)
  *
  * This function will not change the iterator if
- * it's already on the last (end iter) line, i.e. it
+ * it’s already on the last (end iter) line, i.e. it
  * won't move to the end of the last line.
  */
 static gboolean
@@ -1840,7 +1840,7 @@ forward_line_leaving_caches_unmodified (GtkTextRealIter *real)
  * (MOVEMENT OCCURRED && NEW ITER IS DEREFERENCEABLE)
  *
  * This function is currently unused, thus it is #if-0-ed. It is
- * left here, since it's non-trivial code that might be useful in
+ * left here, since it’s non-trivial code that might be useful in
  * the future.
  */
 static gboolean
@@ -2452,7 +2452,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_chars (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
 #if 0
 
 /* These two can't be implemented efficiently (always have to use
- * a linear scan, since that's the only way to find all the non-text
+ * a linear scan, since that’s the only way to find all the non-text
  * segments)
  */
 
@@ -3765,7 +3765,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position (const GtkTextIter *iter)
 /**
  * gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset:
  * @iter: a #GtkTextIter 
- * @char_on_line: a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+ * @char_on_line: a character offset relative to the start of @iter’s current line
  * 
  * Moves @iter within a line, to a new character
  * (not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
@@ -3806,7 +3806,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset (GtkTextIter *iter,
 /**
  * gtk_text_iter_set_line_index:
  * @iter: a #GtkTextIter
- * @byte_on_line: a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+ * @byte_on_line: a byte index relative to the start of @iter’s current line
  *
  * Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
  * byte index. The given byte index must be at
@@ -5338,7 +5338,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_search (const GtkTextIter *iter,
  * Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible
  * mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform
  * better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and
- * comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than
+ * comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it’s a bit faster than
  * gtk_text_iter_compare().
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
@@ -5475,7 +5475,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_in_range (const GtkTextIter *iter,
  * Swaps the value of @first and @second if @second comes before
  * @first in the buffer. That is, ensures that @first and @second are
  * in sequence. Most text buffer functions that take a range call this
- * automatically on your behalf, so there's no real reason to call it yourself
+ * automatically on your behalf, so there’s no real reason to call it yourself
  * in those cases. There are some exceptions, such as gtk_text_iter_in_range(),
  * that expect a pre-sorted range.
  * 
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextlayout.c b/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
index 0e18e82..0426b0f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
@@ -971,7 +971,7 @@ gtk_text_layout_real_free_line_data (GtkTextLayout     *layout,
  * gtk_text_layout_is_valid:
  * @layout: a #GtkTextLayout
  *
- * Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+ * Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout’s buffer
  *
  * Return value: %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
  */
@@ -1681,8 +1681,8 @@ add_child_attrs (GtkTextLayout      *layout,
  * @layout: a #GtkTextLayout
  * @display: a #GtkTextLineDisplay
  * @insert_iter: iter pointing to the cursor location
- * @insert_index: cursor offset in the @display's layout, it may
- * be different from @insert_iter's offset in case when preedit
+ * @insert_index: cursor offset in the @display’s layout, it may
+ * be different from @insert_iter’s offset in case when preedit
  * string is present.
  * @pos: location to store cursor position
  * @cursor_at_line_end: whether cursor is at the end of line
@@ -1963,7 +1963,7 @@ add_preedit_attrs (GtkTextLayout     *layout,
 }
 
 /* Iterate over the line and fill in display->cursors.
- * It's a stripped copy of gtk_text_layout_get_line_display() */
+ * It’s a stripped copy of gtk_text_layout_get_line_display() */
 static void
 update_text_display_cursors (GtkTextLayout      *layout,
                             GtkTextLine        *line,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextlayout.h b/gtk/gtktextlayout.h
index b6379bc..d113f88 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextlayout.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktextlayout.h
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
 
 /* This is a "semi-private" header; it is intended for
  * use by the text widget, and the text canvas item,
- * but that's all. We may have to install it so the
+ * but that’s all. We may have to install it so the
  * canvas item can use it, but users are not supposed
  * to use it.
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextmark.c b/gtk/gtktextmark.c
index 919b5c9..0f502fd 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextmark.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextmark.c
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_property (GObject    *object,
  * Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
  * If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be 
  * retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left 
- * gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark 
+ * gravity, and text is inserted at the mark’s current location, the mark 
  * will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has 
  * right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the 
  * right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a 
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_deleted (GtkTextMark *mark)
  * Gets the buffer this mark is located inside,
  * or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the mark's #GtkTextBuffer
+ * Return value: (transfer none): the mark’s #GtkTextBuffer
  **/
 GtkTextBuffer*
 gtk_text_mark_get_buffer (GtkTextMark *mark)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextsegment.c b/gtk/gtktextsegment.c
index d1493d6..aef42db 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextsegment.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextsegment.c
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ _gtk_toggle_segment_new (GtkTextTagInfo *info, gboolean on)
  *      unless the entire B-tree is going away.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      If the tree is going away then the toggle's memory is
+ *      If the tree is going away then the toggle’s memory is
  *      freed;  otherwise the toggle counts in GtkTextBTreeNodes above the
  *      segment get updated.
  *
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ toggle_segment_delete_func (GtkTextLineSegment *segPtr, GtkTextLine *line, int t
  * toggle_segment_cleanup_func --
  *
  *      This procedure is called when a toggle is part of a line that's
- *      been modified in some way.  It's invoked after the
+ *      been modified in some way.  It’s invoked after the
  *      modifications are complete.
  *
  * Arguments:
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextsegment.h b/gtk/gtktextsegment.h
index 82ea6b2..ea5f904 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextsegment.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktextsegment.h
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ typedef GtkTextLineSegment* (*GtkTextSegCleanupFunc)    (GtkTextLineSegment *seg
 
 /* Called when a segment moves from one line to another. CleanupFunc is also
  * called in that case, so many segments just use CleanupFunc, I'm not sure
- * what's up with that (this function may not be needed...)
+ * what’s up with that (this function may not be needed...)
  */
 typedef void                (*GtkTextSegLineChangeFunc) (GtkTextLineSegment *seg,
                                                          GtkTextLine        *line);
diff --git a/gtk/gtktexttag.c b/gtk/gtktexttag.c
index 9718a9c..e9ee74a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktexttag.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktexttag.c
@@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ delta_priority_foreach (GtkTextTag *tag, gpointer user_data)
  * 
  * Get the tag priority.
  * 
- * Return value: The tag's priority.
+ * Return value: The tag’s priority.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_tag_get_priority (GtkTextTag *tag)
@@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_get_priority (GtkTextTag *tag)
  * a tag to a tag table, it will be assigned the highest priority in
  * the table by default; so normally the precedence of a set of tags
  * is the order in which they were added to the table, or created with
- * gtk_text_buffer_create_tag(), which adds the tag to the buffer's table
+ * gtk_text_buffer_create_tag(), which adds the tag to the buffer’s table
  * automatically.
  **/
 void
diff --git a/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c b/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
index fdf9cfe..062a71f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_table_lookup (GtkTextTagTable *table,
  * @tag: a #GtkTextTag
  *
  * Remove a tag from the table. If a #GtkTextBuffer has @table as its tag table,
- * the tag is removed from the buffer. The table's reference to the tag is
+ * the tag is removed from the buffer. The table’s reference to the tag is
  * removed, so the tag will end up destroyed if you don't have a reference to
  * it.
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextview.c b/gtk/gtktextview.c
index daa7a3b..a4efa7e 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextview.c
@@ -1801,7 +1801,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_buffer (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * Note that if @iter happens to be the actual cursor position, and
  * there is currently an IM preedit sequence being entered, the
  * returned locations will be adjusted to account for the preedit
- * cursor's offset within the preedit sequence.
+ * cursor’s offset within the preedit sequence.
  *
  * The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
  * gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these
@@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y (GtkTextView *text_view,
  *
  * Note that this function uses the currently-computed height of the
  * lines in the text buffer. Line heights are computed in an idle 
- * handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it's 
+ * handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it’s 
  * called before the height computations. To avoid oddness, consider 
  * using gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark() which saves a point to be 
  * scrolled to after line validation.
@@ -2587,7 +2587,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_wrap_mode (GtkTextView *text_view)
 /**
  * gtk_text_view_set_editable:
  * @text_view: a #GtkTextView
- * @setting: whether it's editable
+ * @setting: whether it’s editable
  *
  * Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
  * this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the “editable”
@@ -2702,7 +2702,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines (GtkTextView *text_view)
  *
  * Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
  * to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
- * by tags applied to @text_view's buffer. 
+ * by tags applied to @text_view’s buffer. 
  **/
 void
 gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -2751,7 +2751,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_pixels_below_lines (GtkTextView *text_view)
  *
  * Sets the default number of pixels of blank space to leave between
  * display/wrapped lines within a paragraph. May be overridden by
- * tags in @text_view's buffer.
+ * tags in @text_view’s buffer.
  **/
 void
 gtk_text_view_set_pixels_inside_wrap (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -2799,7 +2799,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_pixels_inside_wrap (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * @justification: justification
  *
  * Sets the default justification of text in @text_view.
- * Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+ * Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.
  * 
  **/
 void
@@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_indent (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * @text_view: a #GtkTextView
  * 
  * Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
- * Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+ * Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.
  * The indentation may be negative.
  * 
  * Return value: number of pixels of indentation
@@ -10227,7 +10227,7 @@ gtk_text_view_move_child (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
  * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
  * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
- * they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+ * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
@@ -10255,7 +10255,7 @@ gtk_text_view_forward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
  * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
  * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
- * they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+ * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
@@ -10283,7 +10283,7 @@ gtk_text_view_backward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
  * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
  * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
- * they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+ * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
@@ -10311,7 +10311,7 @@ gtk_text_view_forward_display_line_end (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
  * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
  * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
- * they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+ * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
  * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
diff --git a/gtk/gtkthemingengine.c b/gtk/gtkthemingengine.c
index d6e40dc..2ecd22c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkthemingengine.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkthemingengine.c
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
  *
  * #GtkThemingEngine<!-- -->s have limited access to the object they are
  * rendering, the #GtkThemingEngine API has read-only accessors to the
- * style information contained in the rendered object's #GtkStyleContext.
+ * style information contained in the rendered object’s #GtkStyleContext.
  */
 
 enum {
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ gtk_theming_engine_get_style_property (GtkThemingEngine *engine,
  * @args: va_list of property name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
  *
  * Retrieves several widget style properties from @engine according to the
- * currently rendered content's style.
+ * currently rendered content’s style.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ gtk_theming_engine_get_style_valist (GtkThemingEngine *engine,
  * @...: property name /return value pairs, followed by %NULL
  *
  * Retrieves several widget style properties from @engine according
- * to the currently rendered content's style.
+ * to the currently rendered content’s style.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ gtk_theming_engine_get_style (GtkThemingEngine *engine,
  * @color_name: color name to lookup
  * @color: (out): Return location for the looked up color
  *
- * Looks up and resolves a color name in the current style's color map.
+ * Looks up and resolves a color name in the current style’s color map.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if @color_name was found and resolved, %FALSE otherwise
  **/
@@ -568,9 +568,9 @@ gtk_theming_engine_get_state (GtkThemingEngine *engine)
  *
  * If @progress is not %NULL, the animation progress will be returned
  * there, 0.0 means the state is closest to being %FALSE, while 1.0 means
- * it's closest to being %TRUE. This means transition animations will
+ * it’s closest to being %TRUE. This means transition animations will
  * run from 0 to 1 when @state is being set to %TRUE and from 1 to 0 when
- * it's being set to %FALSE.
+ * it’s being set to %FALSE.
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if there is a running transition animation for @state.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c b/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
index 3bbaccd..4e54a8a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
  * A toggle button is created by calling either gtk_toggle_button_new() or
  * gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label(). If using the former, it is advisable to
  * pack a widget, (such as a #GtkLabel and/or a #GtkImage), into the toggle
- * button's container. (See #GtkButton for more information).
+ * button’s container. (See #GtkButton for more information).
  *
  * The state of a #GtkToggleButton can be set specifically using
  * gtk_toggle_button_set_active(), and retrieved using
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
index eb74549..eb82ef9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ gtk_toggle_tool_button_create_menu_proxy (GtkToolItem *item)
  *
  * If a widget is activated and the state of the tool button is the same as
  * the new state of the activated widget, then the other widget was the one
- * that was activated by the user and updated the tool button's state.
+ * that was activated by the user and updated the tool button’s state.
  *
  * If the state of the tool button is not the same as the new state of the
  * activated widget, then the activation was activated by the user, and the
diff --git a/gtk/gtktooltip.c b/gtk/gtktooltip.c
index 47ae1cb..e2bb4cc 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktooltip.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktooltip.c
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
  *   to the signal handler is a GtkTooltip object. This is the object that we
  *   are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback
  *   using functions like gtk_tooltip_set_icon(). There are functions for setting
- *   the tooltip's markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in
+ *   the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in
  *   a custom widget.
  *
  *   Return %TRUE from your query-tooltip handler. This causes the tooltip to be
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreednd.c b/gtk/gtktreednd.c
index d65cdc0..0c6bf7a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreednd.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreednd.c
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ gtk_tree_set_row_drag_data (GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
  * Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
  * %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
  * This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
- * process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+ * process that’s calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
  * is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
  * get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
  * you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemenu.c b/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
index cc02507..67d2c5c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
@@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_model (GtkTreeMenu  *menu,
  * Gets the @model currently used for the menu heirarhcy.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTreeModel which is used
- * for @menu's hierarchy.
+ * for @menu’s hierarchy.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1665,7 +1665,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_get_model (GtkTreeMenu *menu)
  * @menu: a #GtkTreeMenu
  * @path: (allow-none): the #GtkTreePath which is the root of @menu, or %NULL.
  *
- * Sets the root of a @menu's hierarchy to be @path. @menu must already
+ * Sets the root of a @menu’s hierarchy to be @path. @menu must already
  * have a model set and @path must point to a valid path inside the model.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_root (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * _gtk_tree_menu_get_root:
  * @menu: a #GtkTreeMenu
  *
- * Gets the @root path for @menu's hierarchy, or returns %NULL if @menu
+ * Gets the @root path for @menu’s hierarchy, or returns %NULL if @menu
  * has no model or is building a heirarchy for the entire model. *
  *
  * Return value: (transfer full) (allow-none): A newly created #GtkTreePath
@@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_wrap_width (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
  * a menu item should span.
  *
- * Return value: the column in @menu's model containing row span information, or -1.
+ * Return value: the column in @menu’s model containing row span information, or -1.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1888,7 +1888,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_row_span_column (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * The column span column contains integers which indicate how many columns
  * a menu item should span.
  *
- * Return value: the column in @menu's model containing column span information, or -1.
+ * Return value: the column in @menu’s model containing column span information, or -1.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodel.c b/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
index 1312d64..635ecdd 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@
  * Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model
  * is unchanged (and doesn't emit a signal). The model is considered
  * to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to
- * free them from the user's point of view. Additionally, some models
+ * free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models
  * guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers
  * to is valid (most notably the #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore).
  * Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for
@@ -2456,7 +2456,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_copy (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
  * gtk_tree_row_reference_free:
  * @reference: (allow-none): a #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
  *
- * Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL
+ * Free’s @reference. @reference may be %NULL
  */
 void
 gtk_tree_row_reference_free (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
index 0401235..ec966f8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
@@ -75,8 +75,8 @@
  * of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore,
  * #GtkTreeModelFilter explicitly supports this. For example, when a node
  * does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible.
- * As soon as the first row is added to the node's child level (or the
- * last row removed), the node's visibility should be updated.
+ * As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the
+ * last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.
  *
  * This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order
  * to accommodate this, #GtkTreeModelFilter must make sure the necessary
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@
  *
  * Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two
  * cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes
- * in a child's child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your
+ * in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your
  * own. In this case, either rely on #GtkTreeStore to emit all signals
  * because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that
  * do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@
  * similar data structures, many assumptions made in the GtkTreeModelSort
  * code do *not* apply in the GtkTreeModelFilter case. Reference counting
  * in particular is more complicated in GtkTreeModelFilter, because
- * we explicitly support reliance on the state of a node's children as
+ * we explicitly support reliance on the state of a node’s children as
  * outlined in the public API documentation. Because of these differences,
  * you are strongly recommended to first read through these notes before
  * making any modification to the code.
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@
  * rule 1 in the GtkTreeModel documentation.
  *
  * A second case is required to support visible functions which depend on
- * the state of a node's children (see the public API documentation for
+ * the state of a node’s children (see the public API documentation for
  * GtkTreeModelFilter above). We build the child level of each node that
  * could be visible in the client (i.e. the level has an ext_ref_count > 0;
  * not the elt, because the elt might be invisible and thus unreferenced
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.h b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.h
index 9d51997..df2e37a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.h
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ typedef gboolean (* GtkTreeModelFilterVisibleFunc) (GtkTreeModel *model,
  * It must fill @value with the display value for the column @column in the
  * row indicated by @iter.
  *
- * Since this function is called for each data access, it's not a
+ * Since this function is called for each data access, it’s not a
  * particularly efficient operation.
  */
 
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeselection.c b/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
index 0b14d0e..f9cd68a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_mode (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
  * gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function:
  * @selection: A #GtkTreeSelection.
  * @func: The selection function. May be %NULL
- * @data: The selection function's data. May be %NULL
+ * @data: The selection function’s data. May be %NULL
  * @destroy: The destroy function for user data.  May be %NULL
  *
  * Sets the selection function.
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreestore.c b/gtk/gtktreestore.c
index 8bfdd8e..95f7765 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreestore.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreestore.c
@@ -1325,7 +1325,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_insert (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
  * @sibling: (allow-none): A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
  *
  * Inserts a new row before @sibling.  If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
- * be appended to @parent 's children.  If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
+ * be appended to @parent ’s children.  If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
  * the row will be appended to the toplevel.  If both @sibling and @parent are
  * set, then @parent must be the parent of @sibling.  When @sibling is set,
  * @parent is optional.
@@ -1406,7 +1406,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_insert_before (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
  * @sibling: (allow-none): A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
  *
  * Inserts a new row after @sibling.  If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
- * prepended to @parent 's children.  If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
+ * prepended to @parent ’s children.  If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
  * the row will be prepended to the toplevel.  If both @sibling and @parent are
  * set, then @parent must be the parent of @sibling.  When @sibling is set,
  * @parent is optional.
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeview.c b/gtk/gtktreeview.c
index 201df03..512e4b8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeview.c
@@ -4759,7 +4759,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_draw_grid_lines (GtkTreeView    *tree_view,
  * Modify at your own risk
  *
  * KEEP IN SYNC WITH gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon()!
- * FIXME: It's not...
+ * FIXME: It’s not...
  */
 static gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_bin_draw (GtkWidget      *widget,
@@ -6934,7 +6934,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_top_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
 }
 
 /* Always call this iff dy is in the visible range.  If the tree is empty, then
- * it's set to be NULL, and top_row_dy is 0;
+ * it’s set to be NULL, and top_row_dy is 0;
  */
 static void
 gtk_tree_view_dy_to_top_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -8412,7 +8412,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_header_focus (GtkTreeView      *tree_view,
 }
 
 /* This function returns in 'path' the first focusable path, if the given path
- * is already focusable, it's the returned one.
+ * is already focusable, it’s the returned one.
  */
 static gboolean
 search_first_focusable_path (GtkTreeView  *tree_view,
@@ -9534,7 +9534,7 @@ _gtk_tree_path_new_from_rbtree (GtkRBTree   *tree,
 }
 
 /* Returns TRUE if we ran out of tree before finding the path.  If the path is
- * invalid (ie. points to a node that's not in the tree), *tree and *node are
+ * invalid (ie. points to a node that’s not in the tree), *tree and *node are
  * both set to NULL.
  */
 gboolean
@@ -11734,7 +11734,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_headers_clickable (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
  * cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
  * with alternating row colors. Do not use it
- * just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+ * just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that’s a
  * question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
  * alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
  * prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
@@ -13052,7 +13052,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_reorderable (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * #GtkTreeDragDestIface.  Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
  * these.  If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
  * model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
- * these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+ * these changes by connecting to the model’s row_inserted and
  * row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
  * the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
  * drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
@@ -13227,7 +13227,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_cursor (GtkTreeView        *tree_view,
  * @start_editing: %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
  *
  * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it.  This is
- * useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row.  If
+ * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row.  If
  * @focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by 
  * it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is 
  * %TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.  
@@ -13257,7 +13257,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_cursor (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * @start_editing: %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
  *
  * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it.  This is
- * useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row.  If
+ * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row.  If
  * @focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
  * it. If @focus_column and @focus_cell are not %NULL, and @focus_column
  * contains 2 or more editable or activatable cells, then focus is given to
@@ -16246,7 +16246,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row.  When %TRUE, then any of
  * @model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
  * that row and the corresponding model.  @x and @y will always be converted
- * to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+ * to be relative to @tree_view’s bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
  *
  * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
  *
@@ -16355,11 +16355,11 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_query_cb (GtkWidget  *widget,
 /**
  * gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column:
  * @tree_view: a #GtkTreeView
- * @column: an integer, which is a valid column number for @tree_view's model
+ * @column: an integer, which is a valid column number for @tree_view’s model
  *
  * If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full rows, you
  * can use this function to have #GtkTreeView handle these automatically
- * for you. @column should be set to the column in @tree_view's model
+ * for you. @column should be set to the column in @tree_view’s model
  * containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
  *
  * When enabled, #GtkWidget:has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
@@ -16404,8 +16404,8 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column:
  * @tree_view: a #GtkTreeView
  *
- * Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
- * displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+ * Returns the column of @tree_view’s model which is being used for
+ * displaying tooltips on @tree_view’s rows.
  *
  * Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
  * used, or -1 if this is disabled.
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeview.h b/gtk/gtktreeview.h
index 5ccc300..121e10a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeview.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeview.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ typedef gboolean (* GtkTreeViewColumnDropFunc) (GtkTreeView             *tree_vi
 /**
  * GtkTreeViewMappingFunc:
  * @tree_view: A #GtkTreeView
- * @path: The path that's expanded
+ * @path: The path that’s expanded
  * @user_data: user data
  *
  * Function used for gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows().
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c b/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
index 26225f2..963af15 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
@@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_area (GtkCellArea *area)
  * gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start(), and
  * gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes() on the newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  *
- * Here's a simple example:
+ * Here’s a simple example:
  * |[<!-- language="C" -->
  *  enum { TEXT_COLUMN, COLOR_COLUMN, N_COLUMNS };
  *  ...
@@ -2302,7 +2302,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
  * 
  * Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column.  If @max_width is -1, then the
  * maximum width is unset.  Note, the column can actually be wider than max
- * width if it's the last column in a view.  In this case, the column expands to
+ * width if it’s the last column in a view.  In this case, the column expands to
  * fill any extra space.
  **/
 void
@@ -2839,7 +2839,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order      (GtkTreeViewColumn     *tree_column)
  * gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data:
  * @tree_column: A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  * @tree_model: The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
- * @iter: The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+ * @iter: The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer’s attributes from.
  * @is_expander: %TRUE, if the row has children
  * @is_expanded: %TRUE, if the row has visible children
  * 
diff --git a/gtk/gtkviewport.c b/gtk/gtkviewport.c
index 1176cf7..51b6e3a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkviewport.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkviewport.c
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
  * ignore the presence of the viewport.
  *
  * The #GtkViewport will start scrolling content only if allocated less
- * than the child widget's minimum size in a given orientation.
+ * than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.
  */
 
 struct _GtkViewportPrivate
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwidget.c b/gtk/gtkwidget.c
index e882bb2..9e565ea 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkwidget.c
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
  * After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both
  * dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size
  * previously specified with gtk_window_set_default_size()). During the
- * recursive allocation process it's important to note that request cycles
+ * recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles
  * will be recursively executed while container widgets allocate their children.
  * Each container widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the
  * space in one orientation among its children and then request each child's
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@
  * to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.
  *
  * See
- * [GtkContainer's geometry management section][container-geometry-management]
+ * [GtkContainer’s geometry management section][container-geometry-management]
  * to learn more about how height-for-width allocations are performed
  * by container widgets.
  *
@@ -4060,7 +4060,7 @@ gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify (GtkWidget *widget)
  * gtk_widget_child_notify:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @child_property: the name of a child property installed on the
- *                  class of @widget<!-- -->'s parent
+ *                  class of @widget<!-- -->’s parent
  *
  * Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
  * [child property][child-properties] @child_property
@@ -4307,7 +4307,7 @@ gtk_widget_destroy (GtkWidget *widget)
  * @widget_pointer: (inout) (transfer none): address of a variable that contains @widget
  *
  * This function sets * widget_pointer to %NULL if @widget_pointer !=
- * %NULL.  It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the
+ * %NULL.  It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
  * “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
  * as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
  * as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
@@ -4332,7 +4332,7 @@ gtk_widget_destroyed (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
  * not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
- * container, it's easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
+ * container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
  * container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
  *
  * Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
@@ -4575,7 +4575,7 @@ gtk_widget_map (GtkWidget *widget)
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
  * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
- * a widget to be unmapped if it's currently mapped.
+ * a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
  **/
 void
 gtk_widget_unmap (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -4975,8 +4975,8 @@ gtk_widget_disconnect_frame_clock (GtkWidget     *widget,
  * realized and mapped automatically.
  *
  * Realizing a widget requires all
- * the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
- * gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
+ * the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
+ * gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
  * @widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
  * when you realize it, bad things will happen.
  *
@@ -5119,7 +5119,7 @@ gtk_widget_real_queue_draw_region (GtkWidget         *widget,
  * @region: region to draw
  *
  * Invalidates the area of @widget defined by @region by calling
- * gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget's window and all its
+ * gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
  * child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
  * batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
  * receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
@@ -5221,7 +5221,7 @@ gtk_widget_queue_draw (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
  * be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
  * For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
- * queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
+ * queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
  *
  * Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget
  * from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate 
@@ -5276,9 +5276,9 @@ gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw (GtkWidget *widget)
  * frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame
  * on the appropriate frame clock.
  *
- * A widget's frame clock will not change while the widget is
+ * A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
  * mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
- * change the widget's frame clock.
+ * change the widget’s frame clock.
  *
  * Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
  *
@@ -5425,7 +5425,7 @@ gtk_widget_invalidate_widget_windows (GtkWidget *widget,
  * adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
  * methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
  * baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
- * margins, and applying the widget's #GtkWidget:halign and
+ * margins, and applying the widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and
  * #GtkWidget:valign properties.
  *
  * If the child widget does not have a valign of %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE the
@@ -5646,8 +5646,8 @@ out:
  * In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
  * to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
  * method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
- * adjustments include removing the widget's margins, and applying the
- * widget's #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
+ * adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
+ * widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
  *
  * For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
  * instead.
@@ -5727,8 +5727,8 @@ gtk_widget_common_ancestor (GtkWidget *widget_a,
  * @dest_x: (out): location to store X position relative to @dest_widget
  * @dest_y: (out): location to store Y position relative to @dest_widget
  *
- * Translate coordinates relative to @src_widget's allocation to coordinates
- * relative to @dest_widget's allocations. In order to perform this
+ * Translate coordinates relative to @src_widget’s allocation to coordinates
+ * relative to @dest_widget’s allocations. In order to perform this
  * operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
  * toplevel.
  *
@@ -6082,7 +6082,7 @@ widget_new_accel_closure (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Installs an accelerator for this @widget in @accel_group that causes
  * @accel_signal to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
- * The @accel_group needs to be added to the widget's toplevel via
+ * The @accel_group needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
  * gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_SIGNAL_ACTION.
  * Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
  * runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
@@ -6699,7 +6699,7 @@ _gtk_widget_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
  * example changing the operator using cairo_set_operator() or the
  * line width using cairo_set_line_width() might have unwanted side
  * effects.
- * You may however change the context's transform matrix - like with
+ * You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
  * cairo_scale(), cairo_translate() or cairo_set_matrix() and clip
  * region with cairo_clip() prior to calling this function. Also, it
  * is fine to modify the context with cairo_save() and
@@ -6964,7 +6964,7 @@ _gtk_widget_get_translation_to_window (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * Transforms the given cairo context @cr that from @widget-relative
  * coordinates to @window-relative coordinates.
- * If the @widget's window is not an ancestor of @window, no
+ * If the @widget’s window is not an ancestor of @window, no
  * modification will be applied.
  *
  * This is the inverse to the transformation GTK applies when
@@ -7211,7 +7211,7 @@ gtk_widget_event_internal (GtkWidget *widget,
 
 /**
  * gtk_widget_activate:
- * @widget: a #GtkWidget that's activatable
+ * @widget: a #GtkWidget that’s activatable
  *
  * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
  * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
@@ -7366,7 +7366,7 @@ gtk_widget_reparent (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @area: a rectangle
  * @intersection: rectangle to store intersection of @widget and @area
  *
- * Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @area, storing
+ * Computes the intersection of a @widget’s area and @area, storing
  * the intersection in @intersection, and returns %TRUE if there was
  * an intersection.  @intersection may be %NULL if you're only
  * interested in whether there was an intersection.
@@ -7412,7 +7412,7 @@ gtk_widget_intersect (GtkWidget            *widget,
  *          for %NO_WINDOW widgets; relative to the parent window
  *          of @widget->window for widgets with their own window.
  *
- * Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @region, returning
+ * Computes the intersection of a @widget’s area and @region, returning
  * the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
  * check.
  *
@@ -8331,7 +8331,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_state (GtkWidget           *widget,
  * gtk_widget_get_state:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
- * Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
+ * Returns the widget’s state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
  *
  * Returns: the state of @widget.
  *
@@ -8412,7 +8412,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_visible_flag (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
  * Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
- * take into account whether the widget's parent is also marked as
+ * take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
  * visible, use gtk_widget_is_visible() instead.
  *
  * This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
@@ -8472,7 +8472,7 @@ gtk_widget_is_visible (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Specifies whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
  * all realized widgets have a non-%NULL “window” pointer
  * (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
- * is realized), but for many of them it's actually the #GdkWindow of
+ * is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the #GdkWindow of
  * one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
  * themselves in #GtkWidget::realize must announce this by
  * calling this function with @has_window = %FALSE.
@@ -8844,11 +8844,11 @@ gtk_widget_set_sensitive (GtkWidget *widget,
  * gtk_widget_get_sensitive:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
- * Returns the widget's sensitivity (in the sense of returning
+ * Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
  * the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
  *
  * The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
- * own and its parent widget's sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
+ * own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
  *
@@ -8866,7 +8866,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_sensitive (GtkWidget *widget)
  * gtk_widget_is_sensitive:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
- * Returns the widget's effective sensitivity, which means
+ * Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
  * it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
  *
  * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
@@ -9061,7 +9061,7 @@ _gtk_widget_get_modifier_properties (GtkWidget *widget)
  * This way, your widget library can install a #GtkCssProvider
  * with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority in order
  * to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
- * this theming may fully overridden by the user's theme.
+ * this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
  *
  * Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
  * results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
@@ -9346,7 +9346,7 @@ gtk_widget_propagate_screen_changed_recurse (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
  * drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
- * compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
+ * compositing manager is running for @widget’s screen.
  *
  * Please note that the semantics of this call will change
  * in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
@@ -9645,7 +9645,7 @@ gtk_widget_peek_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
  * by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
  * the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
  * or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
- * match any changes to the widget's attributes. This can be tracked
+ * match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
  * by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the #PangoContext for the widget.
@@ -9884,7 +9884,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_parent_window (GtkWidget *widget,
  * gtk_widget_get_parent_window:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget.
  *
- * Gets @widget's parent window.
+ * Gets @widget’s parent window.
  *
  * Returns: (transfer none): the parent window of @widget.
  **/
@@ -10240,7 +10240,7 @@ gtk_widget_child_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
  *
  * When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
  * navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
- * gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget's toplevel.
+ * gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
  *
  * The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %TRUE for
  * %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
@@ -10358,7 +10358,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_usize_internal (GtkWidget          *widget,
  * @width: width @widget should request, or -1 to unset
  * @height: height @widget should request, or -1 to unset
  *
- * Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+ * Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
  * request will be at least @width by @height. You can use this 
  * function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
  *
@@ -10449,7 +10449,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_size_request (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Temporarily establishes a forced minimum size for a widget; this
  * is used by GtkWindow when calculating the size to add to the
- * window's geometry widget. Cached sizes for the widget and its
+ * window’s geometry widget. Cached sizes for the widget and its
  * parents are invalidated, so that subsequent calls to the size
  * negotiation machinery produce the overriden result, but the
  * widget is not queued for relayout or redraw. The old size must
@@ -10493,7 +10493,7 @@ _gtk_widget_restore_size_request (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
  * mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
  * that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
- * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
+ * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
  * so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
  * unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
  * already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
@@ -10523,7 +10523,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_events (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
  * mask determines which events a widget will receive from @device. Keep
  * in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
- * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
+ * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
  * so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
  * unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
  * already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
@@ -10766,7 +10766,7 @@ gtk_widget_add_device_events (GtkWidget    *widget,
  * ]|
  *
  * Return value: (transfer none): the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
- *    if there's no ancestor.
+ *    if there’s no ancestor.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_widget_get_toplevel (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -10786,7 +10786,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_toplevel (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
  * `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
- * the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
+ * the first #GtkBox that’s an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
  * added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
  * about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
  * gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
@@ -11086,8 +11086,8 @@ gtk_widget_get_composite_name (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Makes all newly-created widgets as composite children until
  * the corresponding gtk_widget_pop_composite_child() call.
  *
- * A composite child is a child that's an implementation detail of the
- * container it's inside and should not be visible to people using the
+ * A composite child is a child that’s an implementation detail of the
+ * container it’s inside and should not be visible to people using the
  * container. Composite children aren't treated differently by GTK (but
  * see gtk_container_foreach() vs. gtk_container_forall()), but e.g. GUI
  * builders might want to treat them in a different way.
@@ -11739,10 +11739,10 @@ gtk_widget_real_adjust_baseline_request (GtkWidget         *widget,
 /**
  * _gtk_widget_peek_request_cache:
  *
- * Returns the address of the widget's request cache (strictly for
+ * Returns the address of the widget’s request cache (strictly for
  * internal use in gtksizerequest.c)
  *
- * Return value: the address of @widget's size request cache.
+ * Return value: the address of @widget’s size request cache.
  **/
 gpointer
 _gtk_widget_peek_request_cache (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -12256,7 +12256,7 @@ gtk_widget_aux_info_destroy (GtkWidgetAuxInfo *aux_info)
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @region: (allow-none): shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
  *
- * Sets a shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
+ * Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
  * transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_region()
  * for more information.
  *
@@ -12304,7 +12304,7 @@ gtk_widget_shape_combine_region (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @region: (allow-none): shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
  *
- * Sets an input shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
+ * Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
  * windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
  * gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region() for more information.
  *
@@ -12690,7 +12690,7 @@ gtk_widget_class_set_accessible_type (GtkWidgetClass *widget_class,
  * instead.
  *
  * If @role is #ATK_ROLE_INVALID, the default role will not be changed
- * and the accessible's default role will be used instead.
+ * and the accessible’s default role will be used instead.
  *
  * This function should only be called from class init functions of widgets.
  *
@@ -12714,7 +12714,7 @@ gtk_widget_class_set_accessible_role (GtkWidgetClass *widget_class,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
  * Gets the accessible for @widget, if it has been created yet.
- * Otherwise, this function returns %NULL. If the @widget's implementation
+ * Otherwise, this function returns %NULL. If the @widget’s implementation
  * does not use the default way to create accessibles, %NULL will always be
  * returned.
  *
@@ -12820,8 +12820,8 @@ gtk_widget_real_get_accessible (GtkWidget *widget)
 }
 
 /*
- * Initialize a AtkImplementorIface instance's virtual pointers as
- * appropriate to this implementor's class (GtkWidget).
+ * Initialize a AtkImplementorIface instance’s virtual pointers as
+ * appropriate to this implementor’s class (GtkWidget).
  */
 static void
 gtk_widget_accessible_interface_init (AtkImplementorIface *iface)
@@ -13078,7 +13078,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_expand_set (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
  * expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
  *
- * This function only looks at the widget's own hexpand flag, rather
+ * This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
  * than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
  * wants to expand.
  *
@@ -13120,7 +13120,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_hexpand (GtkWidget *widget)
  * This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
  * regardless of children.  The override occurs because
  * gtk_widget_set_hexpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see
- * gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget's hexpand
+ * gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget’s hexpand
  * value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
  */
 void
@@ -13144,7 +13144,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_hexpand (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * set, then the expand value depends on whether any
  * children of the widget would like to expand.
  *
- * There are few reasons to use this function, but it's here
+ * There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
  * for completeness and consistency.
  *
  * Return value: whether hexpand has been explicitly set
@@ -13175,7 +13175,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set (GtkWidget      *widget)
  * set, then the expand value depends on whether any
  * children of the widget would like to expand.
  *
- * There are few reasons to use this function, but it's here
+ * There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
  * for completeness and consistency.
  */
 void
@@ -14838,10 +14838,10 @@ gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip (GtkWidget *widget)
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @allocation: (out): a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy to
  *
- * Retrieves the widget's allocation.
+ * Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
  *
- * Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget's allocation will
- * be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget's parent
+ * Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget’s allocation will
+ * be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
  * container typically calls gtk_widget_size_allocate() with an
  * allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
  * and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
@@ -14876,8 +14876,8 @@ gtk_widget_get_allocation (GtkWidget     *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @allocation: a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
  *
- * Sets the widget's allocation.  This should not be used
- * directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+ * Sets the widget’s allocation.  This should not be used
+ * directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
  *
  * The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
  * allocation. If you're implementing a #GtkContainer, you want to use
@@ -14965,10 +14965,10 @@ gtk_widget_get_allocated_baseline (GtkWidget *widget)
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @requisition: (out): a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
  *
- * Retrieves the widget's requisition.
+ * Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
  *
  * This function should only be used by widget implementations in
- * order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
+ * order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
  * changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
  * gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
  *
@@ -14995,15 +14995,15 @@ gtk_widget_get_requisition (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @window: (transfer full): a #GdkWindow
  *
- * Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
- * widget's #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
+ * Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
+ * widget’s #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
  * usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
  * window of its parent widget as returned by
  * gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
  *
  * Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
  * by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
- * widget's init() function.
+ * widget’s init() function.
  *
  * Note that this function does not add any reference to @window.
  *
@@ -15096,9 +15096,9 @@ gtk_widget_unregister_window (GtkWidget    *widget,
  * gtk_widget_get_window:
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  *
- * Returns the widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
+ * Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): @widget's window.
+ * Return value: (transfer none): @widget’s window.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -15210,7 +15210,7 @@ gtk_widget_update_alpha (GtkWidget *widget)
  * For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
  * system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
  * running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
- * always, although setting a window's opacity after the window has been
+ * always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
  * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
  *
  * For child widgets it doesn't work if any affected widget has a native window, or
@@ -15283,7 +15283,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_has_focus (GtkWidget *widget,
  * This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
  * should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
  * to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
- * it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
+ * it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
  * window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
  *
  * An example of its usage is:
@@ -15631,7 +15631,7 @@ _gtk_widget_invalidate_style_context (GtkWidget    *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @intent: the use case for the modifier mask
  *
- * Returns the modifier mask the @widget's windowing system backend
+ * Returns the modifier mask the @widget’s windowing system backend
  * uses for a particular purpose.
  *
  * See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
@@ -15897,7 +15897,7 @@ setup_template_child (GtkWidgetTemplate *template_data,
  * initializers.
  *
  * Another reason is that when calling g_object_new() on a widget with
- * composite templates, it's important to build the composite widgets
+ * composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
  * before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new()
  * should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
  *
@@ -15997,7 +15997,7 @@ gtk_widget_init_template (GtkWidget *widget)
  * For convenience, gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource() is also provided.
  *
  * Note that any class that installs templates must call gtk_widget_init_template()
- * in the widget's instance initializer.
+ * in the widget’s instance initializer.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -16021,7 +16021,7 @@ gtk_widget_class_set_template (GtkWidgetClass    *widget_class,
  * A convenience function to call gtk_widget_class_set_template().
  *
  * Note that any class that installs templates must call gtk_widget_init_template()
- * in the widget's instance initializer.
+ * in the widget’s instance initializer.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -16095,7 +16095,7 @@ gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback_full (GtkWidgetClass *widget_class,
  *                        class finalization time, when no classes of type @widget_type are in use anymore.
  *
  * For use in lanuage bindings, this will override the default #GtkBuilderConnectFunc to be
- * used when parsing GtkBuilder xml from this class's template data.
+ * used when parsing GtkBuilder xml from this class’s template data.
  *
  * Note that this must be called from a composite widget classes class
  * initializer after calling gtk_widget_class_set_template().
@@ -16127,17 +16127,17 @@ gtk_widget_class_set_connect_func (GtkWidgetClass        *widget_class,
  * @name: The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
  * @internal_child: Whether the child should be accessible as an “internal-child”
  *                  when this class is used in GtkBuilder XML
- * @struct_offset: The structure offset into the composite widget's instance public or private structure
+ * @struct_offset: The structure offset into the composite widget’s instance public or private structure
  *                 where the automated child pointer should be set, or 0 to not assign the pointer.
  *
  * Automatically assign an object declared in the class template XML to be set to a location
- * on a freshly built instance's private data, or alternatively accessible via 
gtk_widget_get_template_child().
+ * on a freshly built instance’s private data, or alternatively accessible via 
gtk_widget_get_template_child().
  *
  * The struct can point either into the public instance, then you should use G_STRUCT_OFFSET(WidgetType, 
member)
  * for @struct_offset,  or in the private struct, then you should use G_PRIVATE_OFFSET(WidgetType, member).
  *
  * An explicit strong reference will be held automatically for the duration of your
- * instance's life cycle, it will be released automatically when #GObjectClass.dispose() runs
+ * instance’s life cycle, it will be released automatically when #GObjectClass.dispose() runs
  * on your instance and if a @struct_offset that is != 0 is specified, then the automatic location
  * in your instance public or private data will be set to %NULL. You can however access an automated child
  * pointer the first time your classes #GObjectClass.dispose() runs, or alternatively in
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwidget.h b/gtk/gtkwidget.h
index 31a0a51..7649054 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwidget.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkwidget.h
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ G_BEGIN_DECLS
 /**
  * GtkWidgetHelpType:
  * @GTK_WIDGET_HELP_TOOLTIP: Tooltip.
- * @GTK_WIDGET_HELP_WHATS_THIS: What's this.
+ * @GTK_WIDGET_HELP_WHATS_THIS: What’s this.
  *
  * Kinds of widget-specific help. Used by the ::show-help signal.
  */
@@ -70,15 +70,15 @@ typedef struct _GtkWidgetAuxInfo       GtkWidgetAuxInfo;
 
 /**
  * GtkAllocation:
- * @x: the X position of the widget's area relative to its parents allocation.
- * @y: the Y position of the widget's area relative to its parents allocation.
- * @width: the width of the widget's allocated area.
- * @height: the height of the widget's allocated area.
+ * @x: the X position of the widget’s area relative to its parents allocation.
+ * @y: the Y position of the widget’s area relative to its parents allocation.
+ * @width: the width of the widget’s allocated area.
+ * @height: the height of the widget’s allocated area.
  *
  * A #GtkAllocation-struct of a widget represents region
  * which has been allocated to the widget by its parent. It is a subregion
  * of its parents allocation. See
- * [GtkWidget's geometry management section][geometry-management] for
+ * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for
  * more information.
  */
 typedef        GdkRectangle       GtkAllocation;
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ typedef gboolean (*GtkTickCallback) (GtkWidget     *widget,
 
 /**
  * GtkRequisition:
- * @width: the widget's desired width
- * @height: the widget's desired height
+ * @width: the widget’s desired width
+ * @height: the widget’s desired height
  *
  * A #GtkRequisition-struct represents the desired size of a widget. See
- * [GtkWidget's geometry management section][geometry-management] for
+ * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for
  * more information.
  */
 struct _GtkRequisition
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ struct _GtkWidget
  *   %GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_CONSTANT_SIZE disables any height-for-width or
  *   width-for-height geometry management for a said widget and is the
  *   default return.
- *   It's important to note (as described below) that any widget
+ *   It’s important to note (as described below) that any widget
  *   which trades height-for-width or width-for-height must respond properly 
  *   to both of the virtual methods #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_for_width()
  *   and #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_width_for_height() since it might be 
@@ -208,14 +208,14 @@ struct _GtkWidget
  *   #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height()).
  * @get_preferred_width_for_height: This is analogous to
  *   #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_for_width() except that it
- *   operates in the oposite orientation. It's rare that a widget actually
+ *   operates in the oposite orientation. It’s rare that a widget actually
  *   does %GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_WIDTH_FOR_HEIGHT requests but this can happen
  *   when, for example, a widget or container gets additional columns to
  *   compensate for a smaller allocated height.
  * @get_preferred_width: This is called by containers to obtain the minimum
  *   and natural width of a widget. A widget will never be allocated a width
  *   less than its minimum and will only ever be allocated a width greater
- *   than the natural width once all of the said widget's siblings have
+ *   than the natural width once all of the said widget’s siblings have
  *   received their natural widths.
  *   Furthermore, a widget will only ever be allocated a width greater than
  *   its natural width if it was configured to receive extra expand space
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ struct _GtkWidget
  * @mnemonic_activate: Activates the @widget if @group_cycling is
  *   %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling is %TRUE.
  * @grab_focus: Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the
- *   #GtkWindow it's inside.
+ *   #GtkWindow it’s inside.
  * @focus:
  * @move_focus: Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
  * @keynav_failed: Signal emitted if keyboard navigation fails.
@@ -244,36 +244,36 @@ struct _GtkWidget
  * @scroll_event: Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
  *   pressed.
  * @motion_notify_event: Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
- *   the widget's #GdkWindow.
+ *   the widget’s #GdkWindow.
  * @delete_event: Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
  *   window is closed.
  * @destroy_event: Signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
  * @key_press_event: Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
  * @key_release_event: Signal is emitted when a key is released.
  * @enter_notify_event: Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
- *   enters the widget's window.
+ *   enters the widget’s window.
  * @leave_notify_event: Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
- *   widget's window.
+ *   widget’s window.
  * @configure_event: Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
- *   stacking of the widget's window has changed.
+ *   stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
  * @focus_in_event: Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
- * widget's window.
+ * widget’s window.
  * @focus_out_event: Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
- * widget's window.
- * @map_event: Signal emitted when the widget's window is mapped.
- * @unmap_event: Signal will be emitted when the widget's window is
+ * widget’s window.
+ * @map_event: Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
+ * @unmap_event: Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
  *   unmapped.
  * @property_notify_event: Signal will be emitted when a property on
- *   the widget's window has been changed or deleted.
+ *   the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
  * @selection_clear_event: Signal will be emitted when the the
- *   widget's window has lost ownership of a selection.
+ *   widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
  * @selection_request_event: Signal will be emitted when another
  *   client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
  *   window.
  * @selection_notify_event:
  * @proximity_in_event:
  * @proximity_out_event:
- * @visibility_notify_event: Signal emitted when the widget's window is
+ * @visibility_notify_event: Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
  *   obscured or unobscured.
  * @window_state_event: Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
  *   window associated to the widget changes.
@@ -329,14 +329,14 @@ struct _GtkWidget
  *   greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
  *   orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
  *   adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
- *   which applies #GtkWidget's margin properties and imposes any values
+ *   which applies #GtkWidget’s margin properties and imposes any values
  *   from gtk_widget_set_size_request(). Chaining up should be last,
  *   after your subclass adjusts the request, so
  *   #GtkWidget can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
  * @adjust_size_allocation: Convert an initial size allocation assigned
  *   by a #GtkContainer using gtk_widget_size_allocate(), into an actual
  *   size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
- *   adjusts to a child widget's actual allocation
+ *   adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
  *   from what a parent container computed for the
  *   child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
  *   allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
@@ -609,11 +609,11 @@ struct _GtkWidgetClass
 
 /**
  * GtkWidgetAuxInfo:
- * @width: the widget's width
- * @height: the widget's height
- * @halign: the widget's horizontal alignment
- * @valign: the widget's horizontal alignment
- * @margin: the widget's #GtkBorder margins
+ * @width: the widget’s width
+ * @height: the widget’s height
+ * @halign: the widget’s horizontal alignment
+ * @valign: the widget’s horizontal alignment
+ * @margin: the widget’s #GtkBorder margins
  *
  */
 struct _GtkWidgetAuxInfo
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwin32embed.h b/gtk/gtkwin32embed.h
index 6694a60..da08dfd 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwin32embed.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkwin32embed.h
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ G_BEGIN_DECLS
  * So far all the window messages are posted to the other
  * process. Maybe some later enhancement will add also messages that
  * are sent, i.e. where the sending process waits for the receiving
- * process's window procedure to handle the message.
+ * process’s window procedure to handle the message.
  */
 
 typedef enum {                                 /* send or post? */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwindow.c b/gtk/gtkwindow.c
index 960784e..462ac7f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwindow.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkwindow.c
@@ -1903,7 +1903,7 @@ gtk_window_set_title_internal (GtkWindow   *window,
  * displayed in its title bar; on the X Window System, the title bar
  * is rendered by the [window manager][gtk-X11-arch],
  * so exactly how the title appears to users may vary
- * according to a user's exact configuration. The title should help a
+ * according to a user’s exact configuration. The title should help a
  * user distinguish this window from other windows they may have
  * open. A good title might include the application name and current
  * document filename, for example.
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ gtk_window_set_wmclass (GtkWindow *window,
  * In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
  * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] to identify "the
  * same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
- * might set the “toolbox” role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+ * might set the “toolbox” role on your app’s toolbox window, so that
  * when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
  * the toolbox back in the same place.
  *
@@ -2170,10 +2170,10 @@ _gtk_window_internal_set_focus (GtkWindow *window,
  * @default_widget: (allow-none): widget to be the default, or %NULL to unset the
  *                  default widget for the toplevel.
  *
- * The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user
+ * The default widget is the widget that’s activated when the user
  * presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or
  * unsets the default widget for a #GtkWindow about. When setting
- * (rather than unsetting) the default widget it's generally easier to
+ * (rather than unsetting) the default widget it’s generally easier to
  * call gtk_widget_grab_focus() on the widget. Before making a widget
  * the default widget, you must call gtk_widget_set_can_default() on the
  * widget you'd like to make the default.
@@ -2962,7 +2962,7 @@ gtk_window_get_attached_to (GtkWindow *window)
  * running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
  * always.
  * 
- * Note that setting a window's opacity after the window has been
+ * Note that setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
  * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -3438,7 +3438,7 @@ gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent (GtkWindow *window)
  * @window: a #GtkWindow
  * @setting: whether to hide the titlebar when @window is maximized
  *
- * If @setting is %TRUE, then @window will request that it's titlebar
+ * If @setting is %TRUE, then @window will request that it’s titlebar
  * should be hidden when maximized.
  * This is useful for windows that don't convey any information other
  * than the application name in the titlebar, to put the available
@@ -3761,7 +3761,7 @@ _gtk_window_titlebar_shows_app_menu (GtkWindow *window)
  * function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
  * already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk_widget_show().
  *
- * On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
+ * On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager
  * policy involved.
  * 
  **/
@@ -3835,7 +3835,7 @@ gtk_window_get_decorated (GtkWindow *window)
  * function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
  * already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk_widget_show().
  *
- * On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
+ * On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager
  * policy involved.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -4166,7 +4166,7 @@ gtk_window_unrealize_icon (GtkWindow *window)
  *
  * Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
  * window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
- * icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+ * icon from their transient parent. So there’s no need to explicitly
  * set the icon on transient windows.
  **/
 void
@@ -4210,7 +4210,7 @@ gtk_window_set_icon_list (GtkWindow  *window,
  * The list is copied, but the reference count on each
  * member won't be incremented.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of window's icon list
+ * Return value: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of window’s icon list
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_window_get_icon_list (GtkWindow  *window)
@@ -4670,7 +4670,7 @@ gtk_window_set_default_size_internal (GtkWindow    *window,
  * @width: width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
  * @height: height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
  *
- * Sets the default size of a window. If the window's “natural” size
+ * Sets the default size of a window. If the window’s “natural” size
  * (its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
  * ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
  * geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
@@ -4684,7 +4684,7 @@ gtk_window_set_default_size_internal (GtkWindow    *window,
  * again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
  * use the “natural” default size (the size request of the window).
  *
- * For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
+ * For more control over a window’s initial size and how resizing works,
  * investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
  *
  * For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
@@ -4871,7 +4871,7 @@ gtk_window_resize_to_geometry (GtkWindow *window,
  *
  * Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
  * the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
- * way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+ * way is to simply set the window’s semantic type with
  * gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
  * e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
  * dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
@@ -4884,7 +4884,7 @@ gtk_window_resize_to_geometry (GtkWindow *window,
  * application cannot.
  *
  * In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
- * positioning, there's still a better way than
+ * positioning, there’s still a better way than
  * doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
  * handle the details for you.
  * 
@@ -5059,8 +5059,8 @@ gtk_window_move (GtkWindow *window,
  * gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
  * because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
  *
- * If you are saving and restoring your application's window
- * positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
+ * If you are saving and restoring your application’s window
+ * positions, you should know that it’s impossible for applications to
  * do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
  * not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
  * Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
@@ -7449,7 +7449,7 @@ gtk_window_get_has_resize_grip (GtkWindow *window)
  * If a window has a resize grip, this will retrieve the grip
  * position, width and height into the specified #GdkRectangle.
  *
- * Returns: %TRUE if the resize grip's area was retrieved
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the resize grip’s area was retrieved
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -9936,13 +9936,13 @@ gtk_window_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
  * in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
  * desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
- * on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+ * on the user’s platform, window manager, and preferences.
  *
  * If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
  * as well.
  * 
  * This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
- * that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
+ * that’s already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
  * currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
  * a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
  * where the user can see it.
@@ -10027,7 +10027,7 @@ gtk_window_present_with_time (GtkWindow *window,
  * iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
  * up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
  *
- * It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+ * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
  * in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
  * onscreen.
  *
@@ -10100,7 +10100,7 @@ gtk_window_deiconify (GtkWindow *window)
  * windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
  * write code that crashes if not.
  *
- * It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
+ * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window.
  *
  * You can track stickiness via the “window-state-event” signal
  * on #GtkWidget.
@@ -10131,7 +10131,7 @@ gtk_window_stick (GtkWindow *window)
  * @window: a #GtkWindow
  *
  * Asks to unstick @window, which means that it will appear on only
- * one of the user's desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+ * one of the user’s desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the
  * window is definitely unstuck afterward, because other entities
  * (e.g. the user or [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could
  * stick it again. But normally the window will
@@ -10173,7 +10173,7 @@ gtk_window_unstick (GtkWindow *window)
  * normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code
  * that crashes if not.
  *
- * It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+ * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
  * in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
  * initially.
  *
@@ -10324,7 +10324,7 @@ gtk_window_unfullscreen (GtkWindow *window)
  * normally the window will end kept above. Just don't write code
  * that crashes if not.
  *
- * It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+ * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
  * in which case the window will be kept above when it appears onscreen
  * initially.
  *
@@ -10375,7 +10375,7 @@ gtk_window_set_keep_above (GtkWindow *window,
  * normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
  * that crashes if not.
  *
- * It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+ * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
  * in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
  * initially.
  *
@@ -11821,7 +11821,7 @@ _gtk_window_set_is_active (GtkWindow *window,
  * in-process, parented GtkPlug)
  *
  * Internal function used by #GtkPlug when it gets parented/unparented by a
- * #GtkSocket.  This keeps the @window's #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL flag in sync
+ * #GtkSocket.  This keeps the @window’s #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL flag in sync
  * with the global list of toplevel windows.
  */
 void



[Date Prev][Date Next]   [Thread Prev][Thread Next]   [Thread Index] [Date Index] [Author Index]